Home

F7 Drive User Manual

1. C 2 Specifications C 1 Standard Drive Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240Vac able C 208 240Vac Drives 208 230Vac Drives Model Number CIMR F7U Rated output capacity KVA Horsepower 0 5 0 75 Rated output 3 2 current A Overload capacity of rated output 150 current for 60 sec Current limit of rated output current Heavy Duty 150 Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0Hz frequency Rated output capacity Horsepower 0 5 0 75 15 20 25 100 125 Rated output 1 4 0 18 0 23 0 29 0 120 0 Output ratings 3 6 312 0 Overload capacity 2 96 of rated output 109 current for 60 sec Current limit 96 of rated output current Normal Duty 120 Carrier frequency gt Maximum output frequency Maximum output 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 Vac voltage Proportional to input voltage Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated input current Heavy A Rated input current Normal Duty A Allowable voltage fluctuation Allowable frequency fluctuation 10 10 400 0Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240Vac 5
2. 3 11 L1 01 Motor Overload Protection Selection 3 11 L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel 3 11 Quick Setting Parameters 2 2 21 4 12 R Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation Using Internal Braking Transistor 2 14 Remote Mount Resistor Unit s Installation essere 2 15 REMOTE Reference REF Indicator 3 5 REMOTE Sequence SEQ Indicator 3 4 Index 5 REVISION code ee NU 1 4 Run Command Source essen 5 4 b1 02 Run Source Selection 5 4 22 Wire Contrl esee eere eet 5 4 3 Wire 5 4 Run Command Selection 2 4 12 Run Indicator anie 3 5 S Serial Communication Parameters eee UR EE EHE D 4 Sinking Sourcing Mode sse 2 23 Slave Address necem D 5 Spare F 1 Primary Spare Parts sese F 2 SPEC HUMBET ei erigi gie eie deos 1 4 Specifications onere Deep C 1 COMMON sieves erie th enables C 5 Speed Command Source eese 5 3 Reference Source Selection 5 3 Stall Prevention 3 e erre 5 22 L3 04 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Selection esses 5 22 Stall Prevention Selection
3. 2 0221 2 3 ci o c en deut 2 20 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 2 26 Installing and Wiring Option Boards 2 30 Electrical Installation 2 1 Terminal Block Configuration The wiring terminals are shown in Fig 2 1 Fig 2 2 and Fig 2 3 i EU gt EERLWE Ir Control circuit terminals 01060006 uds Ha 40 See Fig 2 3 below for actual terminal layout Charge indicator Ground terminal Ground terminal Control circuit terminal EEEER em 4 layout label Ki T Control circuit terminals eaa je e o e e Charge indicator See Fig 2 3 below for LA ee 9 actual terminal layout ETN MEE rm eaa L91 o RLI 118412 vr v T2 WT3 Main circuit terminals H H 4 DID L Ground terminal al ofa Tt Ground terminal Fig 2 2 Terminal Configuration for Models CIMR F7U2022 4022 and larger V MP AC RP R vs MA MB w
4. 5 10 41 03 Frequency Reference 3 5 10 Index 4 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 5 10 di 17 Jog Reference uides 5 10 Preventive Maintenance 7 3 oreet eee e ede 7 3 Procedure for Setting Up Communication D 3 Programming Menu ADV sese 3 12 A1 Initialization 2 3 12 A2 User Parameters n n 3 12 DE Sequence i2 repre 3 12 b2 DC Injection Braking eee 3 12 D3 Speed Search s RERO 3 12 b4 Delay Timers 2 3 12 PID Control reri m edle tet 3 12 b6 Reference Hold 3 12 b7 Dtoop conttol Roa 3 12 b8 Energy Saving 3 12 b9 epe ir deis 3 12 CT Accel Decel teens 3 12 C2 S Curve Accel Decel sss 3 12 Motor Slip Compensation 3 12 C4 Torque Compensation eee 3 12 Tuning reete Rm 3 12 Carrier Frequency see 3 12 dil Preset Reference cedes 3 12 d2 Reference Limits 3 12 d3 Jump Frequencies 3 12 d4 Sequence amp Trim Control 3 12 d5 Torque Control e e ote 3 12 d6 Field Weakening esee 3 12 El VIF Pattern ciere ee 3 12 E2 Motor Setup renes ttm 3 12 V F Pattern
5. C 3 1 Digtal Operator tic PPM 3 2 Data Opent ke TP 3 3 Dive Mode MACAO S orici ond tikia En EEK REEE TEAT 3 4 Dive Maln EEE AA AATA 3 6 Guik Setting Menu onto pai E 3 11 Programming Menu ADY ai 3 12 Example of Changing a Parameter 3 15 Table of Contents vii Chapter 4 Start Up MR 4 1 Drive Start Up TL Dive Star Up OS a sie Fab Chapter 5 Basic Programming Control BR ond eee MR EC I _ Speed Command SOUNGE Run Command Source 5 4 d LL IE s POOR otal TUB EE MN M DD M QU MN Mq MM adr Mal rue M E RTT M xpi i RU p ERE bx Input Voltage T mcm V F Pattern Motor Setup PG ODIDI urriakin ET TEE TAE Analog UAM Gain c ML LI IE C MEM Motor scu ERN UTI EM Stall Prevention 2 22 Chapter 6 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting eere 6 1 EE eir M Alarm Detection H Operator Errors OPE EE E Id MM Auto Tuning Fau
6. Torque accuracy 5 Torque response 20Hz 40Hz with PG Frequency control range 0 01 to 400 00Hz Frequency accuracy Digital references 0 01 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 temperature characteristics Analog references 0 1 77 50 25 10 Digital references 0 01Hz Analog references 0 03 60Hz 10 bit with sign Output frequency resolution 0 001Hz Analog setting signal 10 to 10Vdc 0 to 10Vdc 4 to 20mA Acceleration Deceleration time Frequency setting resolution Control Characteristics 0 0 to 6000 0 sec 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Internal braking torque Approximately 2096 Restarting from momentary power loss bi directional speed search Overtorque Undertorque detection 17 preset speeds acceleration deceleration time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence Auto Tuning cooling fan ON Main control functions OFF control torque compensation speed control torque control switch jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PID control with sleep function energy saving control Modbus communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and copy function Motor protection UL recognized electronic thermal overload relay PT Instantaneous overcurrent Stops at approximately 200 of rated o
7. Selects the function of terminals to M6 0 During RUN 1 Closed 2 When a run command is input or the Drive is outputting voltage Zero Speed Closed When Drive output frequency is less than minimum output frequency E1 09 or less than DC Injection Braking Start Frequency b2 01 when in Flux Vector Control Method Fref Fout Agree 1 Closed When Drive output frequency equals the frequency reference the hysteresis of L4 02 Fref Set Agree 1 Closed When the Drive output frequency and the frequency reference are equal to the value in 4 01 the hysteresis of 14 02 Frequency Detection 1 Closed When the Drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by L4 02 Frequency Detection 2 Closed When the Drive output frequency is greater than or equal to the value in L4 01 with hysteresis determined by 14 02 Inverter Ready Closed When the Drive is powered up not in a fault state and in the DRIVE mode Terminal M1 M2 Function DC Bus Undervoltage Selection Closed When the DC bus voltage falls below the UV trip Term 1 2 Sel vel set in L2 05 Base Block 1 N O 0 10 38 g osed When the Drive is not outputting voltage Option Reference osed When the frequency reference is coming from the igital Operator LOCAL REMOTE Operation osed When the run command is coming from the Digital perator Torque Detection 1 N O Closed When the
8. D 8 Write In Several Holding Registers 10H D 9 Write In Single Holding Register 06H D 8 Modbus Function Code Details D 8 Modbus Function Codes eene D 5 Modbus Self Diagnosis eee D 18 Modified Constants Menu VERIFY 3 13 Montor Last eir eer e pere iste rr erbe 40 Motor Overload Fault seen 5 21 L1 01 Motor Overload Fault Selection 5 21 Motor Overload Protection Selection 4 14 Motor Rated 2 4 13 Motor Rated Output 2 4 13 Motor Setup ie ctt REP rt regi 5 19 E2 01 Motor Rated Current sess 5 19 E2 04 Number of Motor Poles 5 19 E2 11 Motor Rated Power 5 19 Mounting hole eee 1 5 7 5 Multiple Braking Transistor Units 2 15 N Nameplate Information 1 3 Nameplate bo eletti 1 3 A 16 No Response Message D 7 Noise Filter E 6 Number of Motor Poles eene 4 13 Open Chassis Type enne titer ttes 1 4 C 5 Operation Menu DRIVE UL Monitor Ist pner 3 8 01 01 Frequency Reference 3 8 01 02 Output Frequency 2 040422222 3
9. input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level input Z1 phase input terminals 7 AJ wl Shield A2 phase input terminals ER Pulse generator 2 input B2 phase input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level input N AB Z2 phase input terminals UA Shield connection terminal A phase output terminals oo Pulse monitor output Source depends on software parameter Line driver output RS 422 level output B phase output terminals N N Z phase output terminals N N N Shield connection terminal N ER For pulse monitor terminals 17 22 Electrical Installation 2 38 B Wiring the PG W2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 23 for the PG W2 Branch Circuit Protection PG 1 Pulse A Pulse Pulse A Pulse B Monitor Pulse B Outputs Pulse Z Notes Power supply for PG 1 from PG W2 PG 2 requires external power supply Ground wire e Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for
10. es inductance 0 0 to Leak Inductance 5 5 40 0 E4 4 4 4 4 4 This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning 4 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Motor 2 Rated Output Set to the rated power of motor 2 in kilowatts KW 0 00 to E A 650 00 Mtr Rated Power This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning kW Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 40 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 40 0 to 400 0 Parameters 17 Control Method Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display PG Parameter PG Pulses Rev Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit PGO PG Fdbk Loss Sel Operation Selection at Overspeed OS PG Overspeed Sel Operation Selection at Deviation PG Deviation Sel PG Rotation Selection PG Rotation Sel PG Division Rate PG Pulse Monitor PG Output Ratio Integral function during accel decel selection PG Ramp Sel F1 08 Overspeed detection delay time PG Overspd Time F1 09 Excessive speed deviation detection level PG Deviate Level Excessive speed deviation detection delay time PG Deviate Time Overspeed detection level PG Overspd Level Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued PG Option Setup Sets the number of pulses per revolution PPM of the encoder pulse generator Sets
11. 3 10 Operation Menu DRIVE eene 3 8 Operator Programming Errors OPE 6 13 OPE Error Displays eee 6 13 P Parameter Affected by Drive Capacity Setting B 3 Basic Programming eee 5 2 CODY up ep 3 2 Description of Parameter Tables 5 2 Group List o ias OUR eee 3 12 Motor Parameters sess 3 13 Parameter eei A 3 Serial Communication 2 D 4 Set read modified 222222 212 2 22 3 13 Setting pg eed aes 3 12 Part Replacement Guidelines esses 7 4 Periodic Inspection 2 7 2 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied 7 2 Periodic Maintenance of Parts esses 7 4 Peripheral Devices iai tede eet Rees E 6 AC and DC reactor sse E 6 Magnetic Contactor vesiesteen sene E 6 Noise filter edit Rm nS E 6 PG Encoder Feedback Board Terminal Specifications and Wiring Examples 2 32 PG Option secs ssc Siemens a aS 5 19 F1 01 PG Pulses Revolution 5 19 PG Parameters haie teo Re ae nd 4 13 Preset Reference 5 10 d1 01 Frequency Reference 1 5 10 41 02 Frequency Reference 2
12. 5 14 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage 5 14 E1 06 Base Frequency eee 5 14 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency 5 14 E1 13 Based Voltage sosise 5 14 V F Pattern Selection 2 4 13 V F Pattern Voltage Upper Limit 2 2 2 5 12 W Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit and Braking Transistor Unit 2 1 2 15 Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications 2 3 Wiring Checks tnter eorr 2 24 Wiring Diagram 2 25 Wiring Terminal Blocks ees 2 39 Wire Sizes Same for Models 2 39 Wiring Method and Precautions 2 39 Index 6 Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows Normal Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a m to 5 00 p m C S T Emergency After normal hours 7 days a week including weekends and holidays To contact Drives Technical Support please call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 5 for Technical Support Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e mail at DriveSupport yaskawa com Support information such as technical manuals FAQs instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our website www drives com When calling for technical
13. Stop Indicator The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3 6 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode Table 3 6 STOP Indicator Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is less than the inkin minimum output frequenc 09 or the Drive is running in mode and the Blinking ini put freq y E1 09 he Drive i ing in REMOTE mode and the STOP key on has been pressed Digital Operator 3 5 Drive Main Menus The Drive s parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set parameters The Drive is equipped with five menus The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Drive Main Menus Main Menu Primary Functions The Drive can run in this menu Operation Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current displaying fault DRIVE history or displaying the fault traces Quick Setting The Drive can be programmed in this menu QUICK Use this menu to set read the most commonly used parameters Programming The Drive can be programmed in this menu or parameters can be copied into the Digital Operator ADV Use this menu to set read every parameter Modified Constants The Drive can be programmed in this menu VERIFY Use this menu to set read the parameters that have been modified from the
14. Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 22 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display pcm Digital Inputs 30 PID integral reset Closed Set integrator value to 0 31 PID integral hold Closed Hold integrator at its present level 32 Multi Step Reference 4 Based on the status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 d1 16 iex 34 PID Soft Starter Cancel Multi Function Digital Input Closed b5 17 is i d Terminal S7 Function T NM H1 05 35 PID Input Error Polarity Change 0 to 78 Selection Closed PID error signal polarity is reversed 1 to 1 or Terminal S7 Sel 1 t 1 60 DC Injection Braking Closed Apply DC injection current as set in parameter b2 02 61 Speed Search 1 Closed While a run command is given Drive does a speed search starting at maximum frequency 1 04 Speed search based on b3 01 Setting Factory Description Range Setting Open Loop Vector Flux Vector 62 Speed Search 2 Closed While a run command is given Drive does a speed search starting at frequency reference Speed search based on b3 01 63 Field Weakening Command Energy Savings Closed Field weakening control set for d6 01 and d6 02 64 Speed Search 3 Closed And a run command is given Drive does a speed search starting at output frequency Speed search based on
15. Control circuits CIMR F7U4022 to 4055 Control circuits S L2 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 gt Xp Power supply Control circuits Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the Drive and or personal injury 2 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification circuit configuration Electrical Installation 2 10 Cable Length between Drive and Motor If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase causing the Drive output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this reduce cable length or if necessary adjust the carrier frequency set in parameter C6 02 as shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Motor Cable Length vs Carrier Frequency Motor Cable Length 164 ft 50 maximum 328 ft 100m maximum More than 328 ft 100m i Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire 1 208 240 Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 1000 2 480 Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 3 Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding m
16. DIMENSIONS F7 PROTECTED CHASSIS 480V F7U4185 4300 MOUNTING HOLES AIR FOR A SIZE SCREWS H2 1 9 zm IE o Te 4 4 12 5 o 8 v Y 4 o q H1 H o O o 4 4 6 o gt m m W2 ps w1 AIR RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM pn INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING HD ND AMPS HD ND Hi wi H H2 w2 D D1 A ts 4185 370 414 300 300 350 50 00 10 63 51 38 27 95 0 79 335 16 26 4 94 3 8 72 480V 4220 506 515 350 400 400 450 50 00 10 63 51 38 27 95 0 79 335 16 26 494 3 8 616 4300 675 675 450 500 500 56 70 14 37 58 07 36 06 0 79 3 66 16 26 494 3 8 891 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM MODEL CIMR F7U4300 REQUIRES 11 8 INCHES TOP CLEARANCE THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY ND IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 FOR
17. Motor Base Speed 3 aint Oto 1750 Rated Speed Set the base speed of the motor in revolutions per minute RPM 24000 T1 08 Number of PG Pulses Set the number of pulses per revolution PPR for the encoder 0 to 1024 PG Pulses Rev pulse generator being used without any multiplication factor 60000 PPR Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0 Parameters A 39 F7 Monitor List Parameter Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Frequency Ref Control Method Control Method Input Terminal Status Input Term Sts Output Terminal Status Output Term Sts Table 2 F7 Monitor List Description Frequency reference speed command monitor when in REMOTE mode frequency reference speed command setting location when in local mode b1 01 0 Control method set in A1 02 0 V F without PG 1 V F with PG 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Input terminal status 0101010 FWD run Terminal S1 is ON REV run Terminal S2 is ON Multi function input 1 Terminal S3 is ON Multi function input 2 Terminal S4 is ON Multi function input 3 Terminal S5 is ON Multi function input 4 Terminal S6 is ON Multi function input 5 Terminal S7 is ON Multi function input 6 Termina
18. Trim Control Decrease Closed Decrease frequency reference by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal frequency reference Not effective when Preset References are selected Multi step speed digital inputs are closed Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase Reference Sample Hold Analog frequency reference is sampled then held at time of input closure 20 External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Ramp To Stop 21 External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Ramp To Stop 22 External Fault Normally Open During Run Ramp To Stop 23 External Fault Normally Closed During Run Ramp To Stop 24 External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Coast To Multi Function Digital Input Stop Terminal S6 Function 25 External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Coast To 0 to 78 Selection Stop Terminal S6 Sel 26 External Fault Normally Open During Run Coast To Stop 277 External Fault Normally Closed During Run Coast To Stop 28 External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Fast Stop 29 External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Fast Stop 2A External Fault Normally Open During Run Fast Stop 2B External Fault Normally Closed During Run Fast Stop 2C External Fault Normally Open Always Detected Alarm Only 2D External Fault Normally Closed Always Detected Alarm Only 2E External Fault Normally Open During Run Alarm Only 2F External Fault Normally Closed During Run Alarm Only
19. Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 3 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U20P4 21P5 for 200V Class continued Parameter No Name Unit Factory Setting 8 9 A B C D E F amp FF E1 03 V F Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Hz 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 90 0 60 0 Max Output Voltage 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 230 0 Base Frequency 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 Mid Output Frequency V 2 5 2 9 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 Mid Output Voltage 21 8 21 8 Min Output Frequency 1 3 1 5 Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 15 Table 5 4 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U22P2 2045 for 200V Class V F Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 4 V F Pattern for Drive Capa
20. 2 Normal Duty 2 C6 02 0 to F Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform Setting range determined by C6 01 setting Low noise Fe 2 0 kHz C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 5 0 kHz CarrierFreq Sel Fe 8 0 kHz 10 0 KHz 12 5 KHz 15 0 kHz Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 Carrier Frequency Upper E Varies C6 03 Limit Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F CarrierFreq Max kHz Carrier Frequency Lower aries C6 04 Limit Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6 02 F CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency 2 s C6 05 Proportional Gain Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when f C6 02 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 11 Parameter No N a 1 gt 06 07 08 09 10 91 11 12 un 15 16 42 01 42 02 42 03 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Digital Operator Display Freq Parameter Name uency Reference 1 Reference 1 Freq uency Reference 2 Reference 2 Freq uency Reference 3 Reference 3 Freq uency Reference 4 Reference 4 Freq uency Reference 5 Reference 5 Freq uency Reference
21. B Wiring the PG X2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 22 for the PG X2 Drive Branch d Circuit ri 2 V T2 Protection k Power supply 12Vdc Power supply 0Vdc ra diii 4CN Power supply 5Vdc A phase pulse input A phase pulse input B phase pulse input B phase pulse input Z phase pulse input Z phase pulse input T 1 _ A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output EF son Z phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG X2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1 05 PG Rotation The factory preset is for motor forward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 22 PG X2 Wiring Electrical Installation 2 37 B PG W2 The terminal specifications for the PG W2 are given in Table 2 22 Table 2 22 PG W2 Terminal Specifications Terminal No Contents Specifications 12Vdc 45 200mA max Power supply for Pulse Generator OVdc GND for power supply 1 input terminals Pulse generator 1 input 1
22. Oto 10Vde 20 0 Multi function Analog Input2 H3 05 AC 5 _ RP 32 2 5 to 12Vdc Multi function Pulse Input H6 01 F AC Jumper CN15 1 Terminating CH2 res V 1 11 Bit Resolution 0 2 11 Bit Resolution 0 1100 2 y 1 R 1 11 DIP Switch 1 11 Bit Resolution 0 2 Accuracy Modbus RTU 151 1 Communications DICE S12 4 55 Accuracy RS 485 422 I 6 S 19 2 Kbps 5 ON 12 Pulse Input Terminals R1 L11 51 121 T1 L31 are standard on CIMR F7U2022 2110 AND CIMR F7U4022 4300 57 External Braking Terminal 3 is standard on CIMR F7U2022 2110 and 704022 4300 Stop peration 3 Wire Control t Switch OD CONTO Braking Terminals B1 B2 are standard on models Ne CIMR F7U20P4 2018 and CIMR F7U40P4 4018 contact contact 0 00 0 516 Run command run on momentary close 52 Stop command stop on momentary open Fwd Rev 55 Fig 2 9 Terminal Connections Forward reverse command multi function input Sequence input common Electrical Installation 2 19 Control Wiring Control Circuit Terminal Functions The factory default functions of the control circuit terminals for 2 wire control are shown in Table 2 11 Digital Input Signals Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals Forward run stop command 222085 Forward run when
23. Specifications C 6 Appendix D Communications This appendix details the specifications connections and programming of the Drive for Modbus communication Using Modbus D 2 Modbus Function Code 5 D 8 Modbus Data Tables esee D 10 Modbus Self Diagnosis Communications D 1 Using Modbus Communication Serial communication can be performed with Program Logic Controllers PLCs or similar master devices using the Modbus protocol Modbus Communication Configuration Modbus communication is configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial communication between master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time Consequently the slave address of each slave must be initially set so that the master can perform serial communication using that address Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified functions and send a response back to the master Master Slaves Fig D 1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive Communication Specifications The Modbus communication specifications are shown below Table D 1 Modbus Communication Specifications Specifications Interface RS 4
24. iM THRX GFF d Powerohm Resistors Inc i i FAULT comer 12222 Fig 2 6 Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 3 Reinstall and secure Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover and Drive front cover 4 Proceed to Adjustments section on Page 2 18 Electrical Installation 2 14 Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s Installation for F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it to a noncombustible surface in a location away from other equipment Select mounting locations for Braking Transistor Unit s and Remote Mount Resistor Unit s so that wiring between the Drive and the Braking Transistor Unit is 16 feet 5m or less and the wiring between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit is less than 33 feet 10m 1 Mount the Braking Transistor Unit s on a vertical surface The Braking Transistor Unit requires a minimum of 1 18 inches 30mm clearance on each side and a minimum 3 94 inches 100mm clearance top and bottom Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit maintaining a minimum 1 97 inches 50mm clearance on each side and a minimum 7 87 inches 200mm clearance on top 2 In each Braking Transistor Unit set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the correct setting for the installation this is factory set at t
25. 2 21 Modbus communication output 2 21 Multi step speed reference 1 2 20 Multi step speed reference 2 2 20 Output current 2 2 21 Output frequency 2 21 pe 2 21 Pulse MONO 2 21 Remote auto operation contact 2 20 Reverse run stop command 2 20 Shield wire optional ground line connection point 2 20 Signal COMMON 2 21 Terminals caer eet ntu ite 1 5 Terminal Layout 2 2 Wire s cdd RR RES 2 24 Wiring Precautions 2 2 24 Control circuit failure damage 2 0222221 6 3 Control circuit fault os cete 6 8 Control Method esses 5 2 Control Method Selection sss 4 12 Control Wiring e e 2 20 D Deceleration Time 1 sss 4 12 Delivery Confirmation o deperit eer 1 3 Receiving Checks sse 1 3 Diagnostics amp Troubleshooting sees 6 1 Digital Operator 1 5 1 6 1 16 4 15 4 7 5 3 Index 1 Alarm Detection 6 9 urn LE 1 14 Auto Tuning Faults 6 15 16 Connection 6 7 CODLFa
26. 5 3 Run Command SOurce 5 4 Stopping 440 5 5 Accel Decel oo re opt Ops tes 5 8 Carrier sredlelloy cate 5 9 Preset 8000 5 10 Input Voltage 5 11 e cp 5 11 5 19 5 19 Analog Output Gain 5 20 Motor Overload Fault mr roii ba RES 5 21 Stall PIGVellllor xo os e acuerdo ed ta 5 22 Basic Programming 5 1 F7 Basic Programming Parameters Description of Parameter Tables This chapter details all of the parameters in the Quick Setting Menu QUICK Some parameters are not available for all Control Methods See Appendix A for details Setting range and factory default value of the parameter follows the control method table for each parameter Control Method B 1 02 Control Method Selection wE O V F Control factory default The setting of parameter A1 02 determines which control method the Drive will use for operation Select the control method best suited for the application V F Control is for general purpose and multiple motor applications V F with PG Feedback is for general purpose applications requiring closed loop speed control Open Loop Vector is for applications requiring precise speed control quick response and higher torque at low speeds 15096 torque below 1 7 Flux Vector Control is for applications requiring ver
27. Mao 1 Modbus T E UON RICO SERIEN Table of Contents ix Appendix E Peripheral Devices ecce E 1 Branch Circuit Short Circuit P DDIQUOI E 2 Branch Circuit Overload PPODSODOD i rien Erie redd e Hh ka eran E nt P PIRE FAR Ra E 5 jc p DEV o C Server E 6 Appendix F Spare F 1 Primary Spare Parts CA VAG ca cs F 2 F7 Primary Spam Pale B0 Iu F 3 ID bisce a OO T E Index 1 Suppiit Seded erue aine ibn do pesca Ran DL ERA Inside rear cover Table of Contents x Chapter 1 Physical Installation This chapter describes the requirements for receiving and installing the F7 Drive F7 Model Number Enclosure Heat Loss and Weight 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery 1 3 Component Names o oec P Ee ete ag 1 5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Bront GOVERN 1 14 Physical Installation 1 1 F7 Model Number
28. PID Output Reverse 0 0 limit when PID output goes negative Drive stops 0 limit is b5 11 Selection automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 Output Rev Sel 1 Reverse when PID goes negative Drive reverses PID Feedback Reference 0 Disabled b5 12 Missing Detection Selection 1 Alarm Fb los Det Sel 2 Fault Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as percentage of b5 13 Level 0 to 100 Fb los Det Lvl maximum frequency 1 04 b5 14 dE pp Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of 0 0 to Fb los Det Time 239 Sleep Function Start bd b5 15 Level Sets the sleep function start frequency Du PID Sleep Level Rating PID Sleep Delay Time 5 RUE b5 16 PID Sleep Time Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds Applies accel decel time to the PID setpoint reference The b5 17 PID Accel Decel Time Drive s standard softstarter C1 XX and S curve still affects the PID Ace Dec Time output of the PID algorithm PID Setpoint Selection Allows the b5 19 setting to be the PID target setpoint value b5 18 PID Setpoint Sel 0 Disabled P 1 Enabled PID Setpoint Value 5 19 PID Setpoint Sets the PID target value Use only when b5 18 1 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating C6 01 0 Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating C6 01 2 Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0
29. Torque Control Selects speed or torque control The torque reference is set via analog input A2 or A3 when it is set for torque reference H3 05 or H3 09 13 Torque reference is 4 set as percentage of motor rated torque d5 01 mE To use this function for switching between speed and torque 0101 4 control set to 0 and set a multi function input to speed torque control change H1 XX 71 0 Speed Control controlled by C5 01 to C5 07 1 Torque Control Sets the torque reference delay time in ms units Torque Reference Delay Sr This function can be used to correct for noise in the torque control Oto d5 02 Time signal or the responsiveness with the host controller When 1000 Torq Ref Filter MN auk oscillation occurs during torque control increase the set value Sets the speed limit command method for the torque control method Speed Limit Selection Analog Input Limited by the output of the soft starter b1 01 d5 03 227 selection and active acceleration deceleration and S curve 1102 Speed Limit Sel SD settings Program Setting Limited by d5 04 setting value Sets the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency 1 04 d5 04 Speed Limit This function is enabled when d5 03 is set to 2 Directions are as 120 to Speed Lmt Value follows 120 run command direction run command opposite direction Speed Limit Bias Sets the speed limi
30. Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monito DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref List Access Procedure r parameter list See Appendix A for functional description Table 3 8 U1 Monitor List 01 12 Drive Operation Status 01 13 Cumulative Operation Time 1 1 ASRInput 1 22 ASR Output 1 24 Feedback Value 1 25 DI 16 H2 Input Status 1 26 Output Voltage Reference Vq 1 27 Output Voltage Reference Vd 1 28 CPU Number 1 29 kWh Lower 4 digits 1 30 MWh Upper 5 digits 1 32 ACR q Output 01 33 ACR d Output 1 34 OPE Detected 1 35 1 36 Input 1 37 PID Output 1 38 Setpoint U1 39 Modbus Error Code 1 40 Cooling Fan Elapsed Time 1 44 ASR Output with or without Filter U1 45 c Zero Servo Pulse Count Feed Forward Control Output Note Some monitors are not available for all Control Modes A1 02 Digital Operator 3 8 02 Fault Trace List After viewing the Monitor parameter list follow the key operations below Fig 3 4 to access the Fault Trace parameter list DRIVE Rdy DRIVE DRIVE Rdy Monitor Fault Trace Current Fault ESC 1 1 gt None 01 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 00A U2 03 U2 03 Fig 3 4 U2 Fault Trace List Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list Represents fault condition prior to current fault state Note Fault trace is not executed at CPFO1 CPF03
31. YASKAWA 27 Drive User Manual 2150 eed Ted ed drives com Model CIMR F7U Document Number TM F7 01 Warnings and Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product that if not heeded may result in personal injury fatality or equipment damage Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions WARNING YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control Without exception all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances products designed to incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to that part s safe use and operation Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the end user YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual NO OTHER WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED IS OFFERED YASKAWA
32. 6 9 Ambient Temperature eese 1 11 Analog Output Gain sese 5 20 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain eese 5 20 05 Terminal AM Gain 5 20 Auto iet eb 4 10 No Rotate Tuning eese 4 11 Standard ee etes 4 10 Terminal Resistance Tuning sss 4 11 Auto Tuning Faults sese 6 15 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and Processing 6 15 Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE eere 3 13 T1 01 Tuning Mode Selection 3 14 T1 02 Motor Rated Power 3 14 T1 03 Rated Voltage esee 3 14 T1 04 Rated eee 3 14 T1 05 Rated Frequency eee 3 14 T1 06 Number of Poles eene 3 14 T1 07 Rated Speed iem 3 14 T1 08 PG Pulses Rev eere 3 14 B Base Frequency 2 4 13 Base Voltage e oes 4 13 Braking Transistor Unit s Installation cree eee ees 2 15 Adjustments essere 2 18 Operation Check edm Ene 2 18 Branch Circuit Overload Protection E 5 Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection E 2 C Capacity Related Parameters 2 2 2 2 22 2 21 B 1 Carrier Frequency 5 9 Carrier Fre
33. 945 47 827 307 1 4 542 579 665 394 173 242 2018 71 0 74 8 25 25 1319 850 1456 945 30 47 827 307 14 512 579 665 394 173 242 40P4 1 8 1 8 add 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 335 473 197 110 66 40P7 24 24 1A 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 335 473 197 110 66 41 5 37 37 1 5 2 1 5 2 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 42P2 5 3 5 3 3 3 10 47 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232 10 414 552 197 110 88 43P7 7 6 7 6 5 5 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232 414 552 197 110 88 44P0 87 87 NA NA 1047 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 414 552 197 110 88 480V 45P5 12 5 12 5 7 5 7 5 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232 10 414 552 197 110 88 47 5 17 0 17 0 10 10 1122 732 11 81 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 5 11 621 307 138 132 4011 24 0 27 0 15 15 20 11 22 732 1181 787 28 28 787 258 1 4 463 5 11 6 21 3 07 138 132 4015 31 0 34 0 20 25 1319 50 1378 945 47 827 307 14 512 579 665 394 173 22 4018 39 0 40 0 25 30 1319 850 1378 945 47 827 307 14 512 579 6 65 394 173 22 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 475 IN
34. Fault Reset Closed Resets the Drive after the fault and the run command have been removed Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 21 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name RE Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Fast Stop N O Closed Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Motor 2 Selection Closed Motor 2 4 00 Open Motor 1 A1 02 E1 LILI 2 00 Fast Stop N C Closed Normal operation Open Drive decelerates using C1 09 regardless of run command status Timer Function Input for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with the multi function digital output Multi Function Digital Input function H2 LILI 12 timer output Terminal S5 Function PID Disable 0 to 78 Selection Closed Turns off the PID controller Terminal S5 Sel Accel Decel Time Selection 2 Based on status of Accel Decel Time Selection 1 and 2 Program Lockout Closed parameter settings can be changed Open Only 01 01 can be changed Trim Control Increase Closed Increase frequency reference by value in d4 02 Open Return to normal frequency reference Not effective when Preset References are selected Multi step speed digital inputs are closed Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease
35. Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals Noise or spike was on the control circuit input terminals Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 2 Corrective Action Check all connections and verify all user side software configurations Check all connections and verify all user side software configurations Check motor parameters Perform Auto Tuning Remove the Digital Operator and then reinstall it Cycle power to the Drive Replace the control board Remove the Digital Operator once and then reinstall it Cycle power to the Drive Replace the Digital Operator and or the control board Perform a factory initialization Cycle power to the Drive Replace the control board Perform factory initialization Cycle power to the Drive Replace the control board Perform factory initialization Cycle power to the Drive Replace the control board Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Perform a factory initialization 5 External A D Converter Fault Noise OF spike TRU ihe Cycle power to the Drive External A D Err control circuit input terminals Replace the control board The option board was not Turn off the power and reinstall connected properly the option board CPF06 Option Board Connection Error propery Option Error The Drive or option board was Replace the option board or the damaged Drive CPF0
36. PG encoder pulses Power wasn t being supplie received for a time longer than the setting in to the PG Supply power tothe Fer properly pur voltage fluctuation too Check the input voltage arge 14 Braking mechanism is Check for open circuit when using possibly engaged brake motor Remove power from the Drive Detects if the t th t Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened PUF Warning Shorted output transistor s Perform the checks without power ing terminals j DC Bus Fuse Open Never run the Drive after replacing the DC bus fuse without checking for shorted Replace the shorted component s components Replace the defective fuse Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 7 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Dynamic Braking Resistor Verify dynamic braking duty The protection of the heatsink mount Overhauling load extended cycle RH resistor is activated when L8 01 1 dynamic braking duty cycle DynBrk Resistor This fault is only applicable when using the defective dynamic braking Monitor DC bus voltage 3 duty cycle resistor which is mounted on resistor 5 the Drive s heatsink For all other resistors Replace dynamic braking set L8 01 0 resistor Cycle power to the Drive RR ee ob d Replace defective dynamic DynBrk Transistr faile d tn dynam
37. 01 29 kWh Lower 4 digits 3 8 U1 29 MWh Upper 5 digits 3 8 01 32 ACR q Output eene 3 8 U1 33 Output 3 8 01 34 OPE Detected 3 8 01 35 Zero Servo Pulse Count 3 8 01 36 PID Input eee 3 8 171 37 BID O tp t ete 3 8 01 38 PID Setpoint 220042222 3 8 01 39 Modbus Error Code 3 8 01 40 Cooling Fan Elapsed Time 3 8 01 41 Heatsink Temperature 3 8 01 44 ASR Output with or without Filter 3 8 01 45 Feed Forward Control Output 3 8 01 46 Feed Forward Set Speed 3 8 01 49 CPU Share eee 3 8 U2 Fault Trace List iis iieri eee 3 9 02 01 Current Fault eese 3 9 U2 02 Previous Fault ses 3 9 02 03 Frequency Reference at Fault 3 9 02 04 Output Frequency at Fault 3 9 02 05 Output Current at Fault 3 9 U2 06 Motor Speed at Fault 3 9 02 07 Output Voltage at Fault 3 9 02 08 DC Bus Voltage at Fault 3 9 02 09 Output Power at Fault 3 9 02 11 Input Terminal Status at Fa
38. 1 01 4 1 02 5 1 03 S6 1 04 S7 1 05 2 01 S8 H1 06 SN H2 02 SC SP 24Vdc H2 03 E G V 415Vdc 10 20mA V 15Vdc 10 20mA H4 01 FM A1 Oto 4 10Vdc 20 H3 09 H4 04 AM 2 4to 20mA 2500 SI 2 ON 0 to 10Vde 20kQ 51 2 OFF Multi function Analog Input 1 H3 09 6 06 MP 0 to 10Vdc 20 Multi function Analog Input 2 H3 05 AC RP 0 to 32kHz 5 to 12Vdc Multi function Pulse Input H6 01 AC Jumper CN15 CH1 CH2 DIP Switch 51 Fig 2 13 Field Wiring Diagram Electrical Installation 2 25 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Introduction This section describes the measures necessary to comply with the EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive The manual s installation and wiring instructions must be followed for compliance Yaskawa products are tested by certified independent test laboratories for compliance toward the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC The F7 series Drives meet conform to the following standards EN 61800 3 1996 A11 2000 01 EN 61000 4 5 1995 03 VDE0847 Part 4 13 1996 55011 2000 05 EN 61000 4 6 1996 97 IEC 61000 2 1 1994 EN 61000 4 2 1995 03 EN 61000 4 11 1994 IEC 1000 4 27 1997 EN 61000 4 3 1997 CISPR 11 1997 EN 61000 4 4 1995 03 VDE0847 Part 4 28 1997 Measures to Ensure Conformity of Installed Yaskawa Dr
39. 125A 4037 Ferraz 70 125 4 700 125 Ferraz 5005125 4 500 125 Bussmann FWH 150B 500V 150A 4045 Ferraz 70 150 4 700 150 Ferraz 5005150 4 500 150 Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A 4055 Ferraz 70 200 4 700 200 Ferraz A70QS200 4 700 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A 4075 Ferraz 70 250 4 700 250 Ferraz 5005250 4 500 250 Bussmann FWH 250A 500V 250A 4090 Ferraz A70P300 4 700 300A Ferraz 5005300 4 500 300 Bussmann 170 4611 690 350 4110 Ferraz 70 350 4 700 350 Ferraz 50 350 4 500 350 Bussmann 170 4611 690 350 4132 Ferraz 70 400 4 700 400 Ferraz 70 500 4 700 500A Bussmann 170M5610 690V 500A 4160 Ferraz 70 450 4 700 450 Ferraz A70QS700 4 700 700A Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A 4185 Ferraz A70P600 4 700V 600A Ferraz A70QS700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 700A 500V 700A 4220 Ferraz A70P700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 800A 500V 800A Bussmann FWH 1000A 500V 1000A 4300 Ferraz 70 900 4 700 900 Bussmann FWH 1000A 500V 1000A Bussmann FWH 1200A 500V 1200A Denotes letter A through Z Branch Ci
40. 480Vac Table 2 480Vac Drive Specifications Model Number CIMR F7U Rated output capacity KVA Horsepower 0 5 0 75 Rated output current A 1 8 1 4 Overload capacity 96 of rated output current for 60 sec Heavy Duty Current limit of 150 rated output current Carrier frequency 4 2kHz Maximum output 300 0Hz frequency Rated output capacity Horsepower 0 5 0 75 9 5 Rated output current A 1 8 1 4 i 6 6 9 5 Output ratings Overload capacity 3 96 of rated output 120 current for 60 sec Normal Duty Current limit of rated output current Carrier frequency KHz 15 15 Maximum output frequency 400 0Hz Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage Rated voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 Vac 50 60Hz Rated frequency Rated input current 9 0 15 Heavy A Rated input current Normal Duty A Allowable voltage 1096 15 fluctuation Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation Measures DC Reactor Optional for power supply harmonics 12 pulse Rectification Not possible Control characteristics The difference between Heavy Duty ratings
41. Dependent 276 2 to 344 8 1 0 x 2P 31 4 to 39 2 60 x 2P 11 4 to 12 3 16 R L1 S L2 T L3 300 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SUL21 TI L33 150 x 2P 600 X 2P 693 9 to 867 4 325 X 2P 78 4 to 98 0 Application Dependent 600Vac 3 0 x 2P UL Approved 80 x 2P vinyl sheathed or equivalent Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Wire Type 500 x 2P S L2 T L3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L33 325 x 2P 400 x 2P 693 9 to 867 4 N A 250 78 4 to 98 0 125 X 4P Application Dependent 250 x 2P 125 x 2P 250 x 4P R LI S L2 T L3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L33 125 x 4P 4 0 x 4P U T1 V T2 W T3 za 100 x 4P 693 9 to 867 4 N A 400 X 4P 78 4 to 98 0 200 X 4P Application 400 x 2P 203 x 2P 11 4 to 12 3 16 1 61 8200 0200 2400 6400 1 3 to 1 4 Eon 1 25 Wire size range provided for Drives using insulated screw type terminal blocks All other models require the use of UL listed connectors Refer to Table 2 3 2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty ND current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310 16 75 Degree Celsius copper equivalent When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty HD current ratings consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 296 of the rated voltage Line IMPORTANT voltage drop is calculated as follows Line voltage drop V 48 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m
42. ERE 10 0sec 6000 0 10 0sec 6000 0 0 00 to 2 50 0 20sec Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0 Parameters A 9 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Slip Comp Time C3 02 Slip Compensation Limit Cane Slip Comp Limit Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration Slip Comp Regen Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection V F Slip Cmp Sel Torque Compensation Gain Torg Comp Gain Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Torq Comp Time Torque Compensation at Forward Start F TorqCmp start Torque Compensation at Reverse Start R TorqCmp start Torque Compensation Time Constant TorqCmp Delay T Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Motor Slip Compensation This parameter is used to increase motor speed to account for motor slip by boosting the output frequency If the speed is lower than the frequency reference increase C3 01 If the speed is higher than the frequency reference decrease C3 01 This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function Increase to add stability decrease to improve response This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function It is set as a perce
43. Function Code essen D 5 MOO BUS eite ep eee D 5 G Ground W IDE sete e i ptt erg en 2 11 H Heat Sit iui eere et entem 2 12 6 29 Rep ohh ie ee 1 5 Heat Sink Mount Dynamic Braking Resistor 2 12 Heat Sink Mount Resistor ERP 2 12 Installation cancer 2 13 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement 7 5 Installing the Heatsink Cooling Fan 7 5 Mounting the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly 7 6 Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan 7 5 Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly 7 6 High Frequency HP see 2 26 High Speed Operation sss 5 13 High Starting Torque see 5 13 Index 2 Input Voltage 4 13 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting sess 5 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances 1 12 Installation Site Checking and Controlling esses 1 11 Specifications essere 1 11 Installing and Wiring Option Boards 2 30 Installation etes 2 31 Option Board Models and Specifications 2 30 PG Encoder Feedback Board Terminal Specifications and Wiring Examples 2 32 2 32 dedere ptos 2
44. Hp 1 3 5 7 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 1 200 250 300 3 4220 4300 450 500 617260 618390 53020 618410 SID003119 D1 D12 Table F 2 480Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts Continued Drive Model CIMB F7U Power Module Transistor Module DC Bus Fuse Heat Sink Fan Internal Fan o aora STROS QD 1 S 3 ar 1 Ssrmorsn NA 1 5 pp s SrorssQn FANOI066 8D m FU 002032 FI STROOISIS QI FU 002088 FD STROOTSIS QH FU 002008 FD 5 001324 0 FU 002088 FD STR001316 01 03 FU 002040 F1 N A 5 001317 01503 FU 002040 FI 578001294 01 05 80 002120 5 001336 01 00 20 00213 FD 31 NA FU UIM FD FANOOI0S6 8LB2 FANUDIOSH B4 STROOIS22 01 06 80 000892 FD STROOTS22 91 03 FU 000895 FI STROOTSI9 91 012 FU 000895 FI 002117 FD Spare Parts F 3 Notes A E 6 Accel D ecel 5 8 Accel Decel Time C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 4 12 5 8 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 4 12 5 8 Alarm Detection ettet eee 6 9 Alarm Displays and Processing
45. Maximum output frequency Rated output 1 4 5 i 120 0 capacity Horsepower 0 5 0 75 100 125 Rated output PA 50 El 5 5 o 3 6 j 8 312 0 Overload capacity 96 of rated output current for 60 sec Current limit 96 of 120 rated output current Normal Duty Carrier frequency 10 10 kHz Maximum output 400 0Hz frequency 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 Vac Proportional to input voltage The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430 150 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current Models 2110 4220 4300 have an overload rating of 12096 of rated output current for 60 seconds 2kHz is the Maximum carrier frequency value and default carrier frequency value for all models Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequ
46. This is a Digital Operator communication error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re install it Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 18 If the Motor Does Not Operate Properly The following causes are possible the Digital Operator is securely connected to the Drive motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible The Local Remote mode is not selected properly The status of the SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be OFF for Local mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch The Drive is not in Drive mode If the Drive is not in Drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in Drive mode The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency motor does not operate when an external run command is input The following causes are possible The Drive is not in Drive mode If the Drive is not in Drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU key once and then press the DATA ENTER key The Drive is now in Drive mode The Local Remote mode is not selected properly The status of the
47. and UV2 Digital Operator 3 9 BUS Fault History List After viewing the Fault Trace parameter list follow the key operations below Fig 3 5 to access the Fault History parameter list DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Fault Trace Fault History Last Fault ESC 1 gt None None 02 03 0 00A None U3 03 None Fig 3 5 U3 Fault History Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list U3 07 Elapsed Time 3 U3 11 Fault Message 7 U3 16 Elapsed Time 6 03 17 Elapsed Time 7 U3 18 Elapsed Time 8 U3 19 Elapsed Time 9 U3 20 Elapsed Time 10 Note Fault trace is not executed at CPF00 UV1 and UV2 Digital Operator 3 10 Quick Setting Menu QUICK This menu is used to set read the most commonly used parameters in the Drive Follow the key operations in Fig 3 6 to access the Quick Setting Menu QUICK QUICK Reference Source Main Menu Quick Setting Terminals M Fig 3 6 Quick Setting Parameter Access Procedure Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list Table 3 11 Quick Setting Parameter List Number A1 02 b1 01 61 02 1 03 1 01 1 02 41 01 41 02 E103 ELO L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Note Refer to Appendix A for control method dependent parameters Digital Operator 3 11 Programming Menu ADV This
48. parameter an overheat alarm OH will occur Selects the Drive operation upon an OH pre alarm detection 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Selects the detection of input current phase loss power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit electrostatic capacitor deterioration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Selects the detection of output current open phase When applied motor capacity is too small for Drive capacity output phase loss may be detected inadvertently In this case set to 0 0 Disabled 1 Loss Detection 2 2 3 Loss Detection Enables and disables the Drive s output ground fault detection 0 Disabled Enabled Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation 0 Fan On Run Mode Fan will operate only when the Drive is running and for L8 11 seconds after RUN is removed Fan Always On Cooling fan operates whenever the Drive is powered up This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan turn off after the run command is removed when L8 10 0 00300 When the Drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating the Drive overload OL2 protection level is adjusted the Drive is running Parameters 35 Control Method Factory Setting Open Loop Vector 200 200 60sec A A A A Parameter No L8 15 L8 18 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display OL2 Characteristic Selection at Low Speeds OL2 Sel L S
49. x current A x 103 Electrical Installation 2 7 The use of UL listed closed loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire gauge is recommended to maintain proper clearances when wiring the Drive Install connectors per manufacturer recommendation using the correct crimp tool Table 2 3 lists a suitable closed loop connector manufactured by JST Corporation Table 2 3 Recommended Connectors for Terminal Connections Wire Size Ring Tongue R Type Closed Loop Connectors Lugs AWG mm JST Corporation Part Numbers 250 300MCM 125 150 400MCM 200 650MCM 325 Wire sizes are based on 75 degrees Celsius copper wire Equivalent connector can be used Electrical Installation 2 8 Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 4 Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purpose Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 208 240Vac and 480Vac Model CIMR F7U J S L2 T L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 2022 to 2110 4030 to 4300 Main circuit power input Drive outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 gt Braking Resistor 20 4 to
50. 0 Sets the signal level of terminal A3 0 0 to 10Vdc 1 10 to 10Vde Parameters 26 Factory Setting Control Method Open Loop Vector Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name RE Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting i Flux Vector Vector 00 Motor rated torque 5 FWD REV Torque Limit Quadrants 1 and 3 00 Motor rated torque F Not Used Selects the function of terminal A3 0 Frequency Bias Adds with terminal A1 100 2 Maximum output frequency E1 04 1 Frequency Reference Gain FGAIN 100 Frequency reference command value A1 Total gain Internal gain H3 02 x FGAIN Aux Frequency Reference 1 Used in conjunction with multi function inputs multi step frequency reference 1 4 d1 16 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Aux Frequency Reference 2 Used in conjunction with multi function inputs multi step frequency reference 1 4 H1 xx 3 4 5 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Output Voltage Bias 00 Motor rated voltage E1 05 Voltage boost after V F pattern Accel Decel Time Coefficient 00 Active accel decel time 1 01 thru C1 08 DC Injection Braking Current 00 Drive rated current Parameter b2 02 is disabled Overtorque Undertorque Detection Level Used for multi function digital output for overtorque undertorque 00 motor rated torq
51. 0 to 110 0 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Parameter Name Setting i See Jump Frequencies d3 01 Jump Frequency 1 Jump Freq 1 These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant d3 02 vibration of the motor machine This feature does not actually req eliminate the selected frequency values but will accelerate and Jump Frequency 3 decelerate the motor through the prohibited bandwidth d3 03 Jump Freq 3 This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each 0 0 to selected prohibited frequency reference point A setting of 1 0 20 0 will result in a deadband of 1 0Hz Eoo Sequence MOP amp Trim Control This parameter is used to retain the held frequency reference in 01 01 41 01 when power is removed This function is available Frequency Reference Hold Tre js E Function Selection when the multi function inputs accel decel ramp hold or 0101 Jump Frequency Width Jump Bandwidth MOP Ref Memory Lm are selected H1 XX A or 10 and 11 1 Enabled Sets the amount of frequency reference to be added or subtracted as Trim Control Level a percentage of maximum output frequency E1 04 when multi d4 02 en gt eum 5 0 to 100 Trim Control Lvl function inputs trim control increase and trim control decrease are selected 1 1 and 11
52. 01 2 b1 01 Reference Selection was set to 4 pulse input and H6 01 Pulse Train Input was set to a value other than 0 frequency reference A setting has been made that was not applicable in the current control method Example a function used only in open loop vector control was selected while in V F control Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 13 Corrective Action Enter the correct kVA setting 02 04 by referring to the Drive model number in Appendix B Table B 1 Verify the parameter settings Verify parameter settings 1 01 to H1 06 Verify that the option board is installed Remove power to the Drive and connect the option board once more Verify the control method in A1 02 and or the installation of the PG option board Check parameters b1 01 H3 05 H3 09 and H6 01 and correct the errors Verify the control method and the function in question Table 6 3 OPE Error Displays continued Digital Operator Display Description 09 PID Selection PID Control Setup Error OPE10 V F Setting V F Parameter Setting Error Carrier Frequency Parameter Setting Error occurs when C6 05 6 and C6 04 C6 03 OPE11 CarrFrq On Delay C6 01 0 and C6 024 0 1 C6 01 1 and C6 02 z 0 thru 6 F EEPROM Write Error The NV RAM data does not match the EEPROM data ERR EEPROM R W Err The following settings have been made at the same time b5 01 PID Control Me
53. 07 0 75 E2 08 0 50 During Auto Tuning the measured value of motor rated current E2 01 was greater than the set value Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 16 Corrective Action Check Auto Tuning input data T1 parameters Check motor wiring for proper connection configuration Check and correct the motor settings T1 parameters f the motor is coupled to the load disconnect the motor from the load Check Auto Tuning input data T1 parameters Check the motor wiring f the motor and the load are connected disconnect the motor from the load Check the motor rated current value E2 01 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults These faults can occur during the Digital Operator COPY function When a fault occurs the fault content is displayed on the operator A fault does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output Table 6 5 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action PRE 03 01 was set to 1 to write parameters when i Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing parameters the Digital Operator was write protected READ IMPOSSIBLE 03 02 0 into the Digital Operator Retry the Read 03 01 1 Check the Digital Operator cable Replace Digital Operator Low Drive voltage has been detected Check the Drive s main incoming voltage RDE and verify control wiring is correct DATA ERROR An attempted write of the Dri
54. 10 98 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 2 44 1 97 1 10 59 4022 45 50 4 30 NA 17 13 8 66 21 06 10 98 0 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 1 97 1 97 1 10 53 4030 60 67 2 40 40 50 17 13 8 66 21 06 10 98 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 143 5 91 1 97 1 97 110 53 480 4037 75 77 50 60 21 06 10 24 25 00 12 95 0 30 136 1122 4 13 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 173 669 1 97 1 97 130 88 4045 91 96 60 75 2106 1024 28 15 1295 0 30 136 1122 413 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 173 6 69 244 1 97 1 10 88 4055 112 125 75 100 21 06 10 24 28 15 12 95 0 30 1 36 1122 413 1 4 5 18 6 69 8 07 1 73 6 69 2 44 1 97 1 10 88 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY ND IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY 6 01 0 DRBY EK03 1203 REV JCM 03 17 03 APPVL JACO3 17 03 YASKAWA Physical Installation 1 8 DIMENSIONS F7 PROTECTED CHASSIS 208 230V F7U2037 2110 480V F7U4075 4160 FRONT VIEW MOUNTING HOLES P FOR A SI
55. 15 If using an external speed command determine whether the speed command is a 0 10Vdc or a 4 20mA signal Connect the positive side of a 0 10Vdc signal to terminal Connect the positive side of 4 20mA signal to terminal A2 Connect the COMMON of the speed command to terminal AC Note Connect only one input The factory default is 0 10 To change to 4 20mA adjust parameter H3 08 to 2 4 20mA and ensure Switch 51 2 located on the terminal board is in the ON position Check the signal for proper polarity Observe if the speed command can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired If not perform the following For 0 10Vdc input Terminal A1 1 With no input adjust Bias H3 03 setting until an output of 0 0Hz is obtained 2 With full scale input adjust Gain H3 02 setting until an output of 60 0Hz or other desired maximum frequency is obtained For 4 20mA input Terminal A2 1 With 4mA input adjust Bias H3 11 setting until an output of 0 0HZ is obtained 2 With 20mA input adjust Gain H3 10 setting until an output of 60 0 2 or other desired maximum frequency is obtained THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE START UP PROCEDURE Start Up 4 16 Chapter 5 Basic Programming This chapter describes basic programming for the Drive Description of Parameter Tables 5 2 age rdi 5 2 Speed Command Source
56. 170 40 B 170A 6 120 x 451 x 170 4090 FS5972 250 37 A 250A 24 25 5 125 x 24 x 9 475 4110 11 130 x 610 x 240 e 23 15 10 24 x 15 20 x 4 53 24 x 15 20 x 4 4160 FS5972 410 99 A 410A 10 5 260 x 386 x 115 4185 24 25 10 24 x 15 20 x 5 31 4220 UFI000032 A 600A 11 260 x 386 x 135 68 34 11 81 x 28 19 x 6 30 4300 0 1000033 800 31 300 x 716 x 160 Maximum Voltage 480Vac 3 phase Ambient Temperature 45 Degrees Celsius maximum Maximum motor cable length 50m Class B 50m Class A Permissable emission of power drive systems for commercial and light environment EN61800 3 A11 General availability 1st environment Electrical Installation 2 29 Installing and Wiring Option Boards Option Board Models and Specifications Up to three Option Boards can be mounted in the Drive You can mount one board into each of the three option slots on the control board A C and D shown in Fig 2 16 The following Table 2 17 lists the type of Option Boards and their specifications Table 2 17 Option Board Specifications Option Board Model Specifications Mounting Location Single open collector feedback Single A B open collector encoder feedback PG Speed Control Boards Single line driver feedback Single A B Z line driver encoder feedback Dual A B Z line driver encoder feedback Analog input to 10Vdc 20kQ 1 channel 4 to 20mA 2500 1 channel Input resolution 14 bit Ana
57. 1752 2264 059 256 1488 551 3 8 330 2037 145 162 50 50 60 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 0 49 2 46 11 81 3 94 3 8 125 2045 180 192 60 75 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1299 542 3 8 139 3i 2055 215 215 75 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 189 2075 283 312 100 100 125 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 191 2090 346 360 125 150 32 28 14 57 33 46 19 69 0 59 2 56 14 17 5 12 3 8 238 4075 150 156 100 125 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 0 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 194 480V 4090 180 180 125 150 150 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 0 49 246 1378 5 12 3 8 196 4110 216 240 NA 200 32 28 1457 3346 1969 059 256 1417 512 3 8 224 4132 260 260 200 NA 3228 1457 3346 1969 059 256 1417 512 3 8 265 4160 304 304 250 250 33 66 17 52 36 06 22 64 0 59 2 56 14 88 5 51 3 8 352 FOR REFERENCE ONLY UNLESS PROPERLY ENDORSED IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE ADEQUATE COOLING THE DRIVE MUST BE POSITIONED TO ALLOW A MINIMUM OF FREE AIR SPACE OF 1 2 INCHES ON SIDES AND 4 75 INCHES TOP AND BOTTOM THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY ND IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY C6 01 0 YASKAWA EK 03 12 03 DRBY REV APPVL JCM 03 17 03 JAC 03 17 03 Physical Installation 1 9
58. 2 4 8 VIE Start Up niei tp ee 4 6 PG Start up o eise 4 7 Dynamic braking 2 12 Dynamic Braking Connections General rte eed 2 12 Installation err RE RS 2 12 E Electrical Installation eren 2 1 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 2 26 Cable Installation eee 2 26 EMG Directive uie ro eH ett ee ems 2 26 Recommended EMC Filters sess 2 28 Enclosure ty pe icai restet 1 4 C 5 Example of Changing a Parameter 3 15 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions esses 1 7 F F7 Basic Programming Parameters Control Method uice tent nter 5 2 Description of Parameter Tables 5 2 F7 Basic Programming Parameters 5 2 Fault Detection dede tenerte pe eee 6 2 Fault Displays and Processing 6 2 Fault History List A 43 Fault Trace List i oto oet mrt Eis A 43 Field Wiring Diagram eee 2 25 Frequency Reference eee eet ei 3 8 Frequency Reference 1 4 12 Frequency Reference 2 sse 4 12 Frequency Reference 3 eere 4 12 Frequency Reference 4 4 12 Frequency Reference Selection sess 4 12 FroOntiCoVet caede tod 1 5 1 6 Removing Attaching eee 1 14
59. 2 1 eo etc 3 12 EA Motor Setup 2 o ec ete tete 3 12 F1 PG Option Setup sese 3 12 E2 3 12 DI 08 16 Setup oo see 3 12 08 12 SetUp ciem eroe 3 12 F5 DO 02 08 Setup see 3 12 F6 Communications Option Setup 3 12 Digital Inputs 3 12 H2 Digital Outputs eee 3 12 Analog Inputs 3 12 H4 Analog Outputs eee 3 12 H5 Serial Communications Setup 3 12 H6 Pulse Setup eee 3 12 L1 Motor Overload seen 3 12 L2 Power Loss Ridethru sess 3 12 Stall Prevention 3 12 LA Reference Detection 3 12 ES Fault Restart rece edes 3 12 L6 Torque Detection esee 3 12 L7 Torque 3 12 L8 Hardware Protection seen 3 12 nl Hunting Prevention esee 3 12 2 AER teret e 3 12 n3 High Slip Braking eee 3 12 n5 Feed Forward 3 12 Ol Monitor Select siistisi 3 12 02 Key Selections 3 12 03 COPY Function prem 3 12 Auto Tuning eene 3 12 Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter 1 11 Q Quick Setting Menu QUICK sees 3 11 A1 02 Control Me
60. 34 PG D2 2 35 reete e e dee 2 37 PG X2 usc RH Ra ene 2 36 J Jog Frequency Reference oo eee cee eee 4 12 Jumper ehe oet ehe ies 2 22 L Low Frequency EE ose oeste tete petet inen 2 26 M Magnetic Contactor bed he een E 6 Main Circuit Configurations sese 2 9 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 2 2 9 Main Circuit Terminals App 2 3 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors oce bee ic ede 2 3 Recommended Connectors for Terminal Connections esee 2 8 Main Circuit Test Procedure Flowchart 6 26 Main Circuit Test Procedure 6 26 Main Menu Structure 3 7 teet 7 1 Maximum Output Frequency eee 4 13 Maximum Output Voltage sse 4 13 Message Format ener erret D 5 Minimum Output Frequency eee 4 13 Modbus Communication eese D 2 Configuration 2 D 2 Modbus Data Tables D 10 Broadcast Data eese D 16 Enter Command eese D 16 Error Codes oie st beoe eere tb gets D 17 Monitor D 11 Reference Data D 10 Slave Not Responding eee D 17 Modbus Function Code Details Loopback Test 08 D 9 Reading Holding Register Contents
61. 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 deus FS5973 35 07 B 35A 14 141 x 330 x 46 27 5 6 61 8 14 2 375 5973 60 07 B 60A 3 206 x 355 x 60 2015 10 8 9 3125 x 16 x 3 125 DIR FS5973 100 07 A 100A 4 9 236 x 408 x 80 2022 9 48 3 5315 x 14 40625 x 7 STE FS5973 130 35 A 130A 4 3 90 x 366 x 180 13 23 4 750 x 17 750 x 6 6875 2037 FS5973 160 40 A 160A 6 120 x 451 x 170 2045 24 25 5 125 x 24 x 9 4375 zT FS5973 240 37 A 240A 11 130 x 610 x 240 210 42 99 11 81 22 20 x 6 30 X X 0 2090 FS5973 500 37 A 500A 19 5 300 x 564 x 160 2110 400Vac Class 40 4 ET 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 5 X X 1l 41 5 5972 10 07 10 1 1 141 x 330 x 46 42P2 43P7 44 0 2 87 5 50 13 1 875 FS5972 18 07 B 18A 13 141 x 330 x 46 3 97 8 11 x 13 98 x 1 97 47 5 FS5972 21 07 B 21A 18 206 x 355 x 50 4 63 8 11 x 13 98 x 1 97 4011 FS5972 35 07 B 35A 2 1 206 x 355 x 50 4015 8 82 9 250 x 16 x 2 50 rar FS5972 60 07 B 60A 4 236 x 408 x 65 4022 7 5 3 13 x 7 250 4030 pus WA 3 4 80 x 329 x 185 4037 9 92 3 54 x 12 83 x 5 9 ants FS5972 100 35 B 100A 4 5 90 x 326 x 150 Electrical Installation 2 28 Table 2 16 Recommended EMC Filters Continued EMC Filter Drive Model Dimensions CIMR F7U Model Number curren inches Rating mm 10 36 3 54 x 14 375 x 7 4055 FS5972 130 35 B 130A 4 7 90 x 366 x 180 13 23 4 75 x 17 75 x 6 6675 4075 FS5972
62. 500 150A Bussmann FWH 175B 500V 175A Ferraz 50 150 4 500V 150A Ferraz 5005 175 4 500 175A Bussmann FWH 200B 500 200 Ferraz 50 150 4 500V 150A Ferraz A50QS200 4 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A Ferraz 50 200 4 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 200B 500V 200A Bussmann FWH 225B 500V 225A Ferraz 50 250 4 500V 250A Ferraz 3005275 4 300V 275A Bussmann 170M4610 690V 315A Ferraz A50P300 4 500V 300A Ferraz 005350 4 300V 350A Bussmann FWH 350A 500V 350A Ferraz A50P350 4 500V 350A Bussmann FWH 400A 500V 400A Bussmann FWH 450A 500V 450A Ferraz A50P450 4 500V 450A Ferraz A070URD33KI0550 700V 550A Bussmann FWH 500A 500V 500A Ferraz ASOP600 4 500V 600A Ferraz A70P600 4 700 600A Bussmann FWH 600A 500V 600A Ferraz ASOP600 4 500V 600A Ferraz 70 700 4 700V 700A Bussmann FWH 700A 500V 700A Denotes letter A through Z Peripheral Devices E 4 Table E 4 Semiconductor Fuses for Drive Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 400V Series Drive ModelNo CIMR F7 40P4 Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Ferraz Model No A60Q10 2 Rating 600V 10A Fuse Mfr Ferraz Model No 070 006 13 700 6 Fuse Mfr Ferraz Model No 700516 14 690 16 40P7
63. 6 ee ee 0 0 to Terminal FM Gain Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 100 1000 0 100 0 H4 03 Terminal FM Bias Setting EN SM Terminal FM Bias Sets terminal FM output level when selected monitor is at 096 Terminal AM Monitor Selec H4 04 tion Terminal Sel H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Terminal AM Gain H4 06 Terminal AM Bias Setting Terminal Bias H4 07 H4 08 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Selects which monitor will be the output on terminals AM and FC Same function choices as H4 01 Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 10096 output Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when selected monitor is at 096 output Selects the signal level of terminal FM 0 0 to 10Vdc 1 10 to 10Vdc 2 4 to 20mA Terminal FM Signal Level Selection FM Level Select 1 Set the analog output jumper CNIS in the proper position Selects the signal level of terminal AM 0 0 to 10Vdc 1 10 to 10Vdc 2 4 to 20mA Terminal AM Signal Level Selection Set the anal tput j AM Level Select 2 pera RD P JEUPE CN15 in the proper position Parameters A 29 Control Method w PG SESESN Setting Range Factory Setting Flux ME Vector 110 0to 11045 0 0 to 10000 500 110 0to 110 0 0 0 Note Some analog outputs are control m
64. 75 2 B 524 6 Main 8 6 8 14 1 Braking Transistor Unit 12 10 3 5 5 5 600V vinyl sheathed wire Model CDBR 4220 or equivalent Control 18 14 0 75 2 5 M4 Braking Resistor Unit Main 12 10 3 5 5 5 600V vinyl sheathed wire M5 2 Model LKEB ivalent EOD iara For wire size of 8 6 8 14 use UL1283 heat resistant vinyl insulated wire or equivalent 2 4 for Models LKEB 20P7 to 27P5 or 40P7 to 4015 M5 for Models LKEB 2011 to 2022 or 4018 to 4045 Electrical Installation 2 15 L T PART OF USER SUPPLIED EXTEHNAL CIRGLET i Applies when SC is jumpered to SP and S3 is programmed as CONTACT 7771 External Fault REMOTE V QUEUNT exter i UNIT Lr A 1 Fig 2 7 Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Electrical Installation 2 16 6 If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being installed connect them to the Drive and to external circuitry according to Fig 2 8 BRAKING C TRANSISTOR UNIT 81 REMOTE MOUNT LUMIT _ PART OF LISER SUPPLIED eo una BAAKING DO TRANSISTOR UNIT 3 SLAVE Applies when SC is jumpered to SP and S3 is programmed as External Fault Note Connect only the number of br
65. Analog common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Digital Output Signals During run N O contact Multi function digital output Function set by H2 01 CLOSED during operation Remote auto operation N O contact Multi function digital output Function set by H2 02 CLOSED when in local control Frequency agree N O contact Multi function digital output Function set by H2 03 CLOSED when set frequency matches output frequency Form A Dry contacts capacity 1A max at 250Vac 1A max at 30Vdc Fault output signal SPDT MA MC CLOSED during fault condition MB MC OPEN during fault condition Electrical Installation 2 20 Form C Dry contacts capacity 1A max at 250Vac 1A max at 30Vdc pe No Default Function Signal Leva Analog Output Signals Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals Continued Output frequency 0 to 10Vdc 100 frequency 10 to 10Vdc 100 frequency 4 to 20mA 100 frequency Multi function analog output 1 Function set by H4 01 Output current 0 to 10Vdc 100 Drive s rated output current 10 to 10Vdc 100 Drive s rated output current 4 to 20mA 10046 Drive s rated Multi function analog output 2 Function set by H4 04 to 10 10 to 10Vdc Max current 2mA 4 to 20mA 5000 output current Analog common 0 to 32kHz 3kQ 5
66. Cover Mount the front cover to the Drive by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached as this may cause the Digital Operator to malfunction due to improper mating with its connector 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Drive until it snaps into place Physical Installation 1 14 B Mounting the Digital Operator After attaching the front cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Drive using the following procedure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the left side of the opening on the front cover by moving in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locations Fig 1 13 Mounting the Digital Operator 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator and do not mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above or damage to the Digital Operator or Drive may occur IMPORTANT 2 Never attach the front cover to the Drive with the Digital Operator already attached Damage to the Digital Operator may occur Always attach the front cover to the Drive first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover Physical Installation 1 15 Models CIMR F7U2022 th
67. During Decel 4 14 Standard Drive Specifications esses C2 Stop Indicator 3 5 Stopping Method Ree eden 5 5 b1 03 Stopping Method Selection 5 5 Stopping Method Selection 4 12 5 5 Coast tO 5 6 Coast to Stop with Timer esse 5 7 DC Injection to 5 7 T Terminal AM Gain Setting see 4 14 Terminal arrangement sese 1 5 1 6 Terminal Block Configuration sees 2 2 Terminal Card eere 7 7 Mounting the Terminal Card sse 7 7 Removing the Terminal Card 7 7 Terminal Connections Recommended Connectors 2 2 8 Terminal Connections sese 2 19 Terminal COVet nriran rn eR ER ARIES 1 6 Attaching ien ite y ierit tti yen 1 13 Removing ERES 1 13 Removing and Attaching 1 13 Terminal FM Gain Setting sees 4 14 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes 2 21 Top protective cover 1 5 Taal R n HET 4 15 Troubleshooting 6 18 V V F oue iS een eR 5 11 E1 03 V F Pattern Selection 5 11 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency
68. HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY 6 01 0 YASKAWA DRBY REV APPVL EK 03 12 03 JCM 03 17 03 JAC 03 17 03 Physical Installation 1 10 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Drive as described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Drive to a non combustible surface under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree 2 environments This excludes wet locations where pollution may become conductive due to moisture and locations containing conductive foreign matter Table 1 3 Installation Site Specifications Ambient Operating Temperature Plenum Rated NEMA Type 1 14 F to 104 F 10 to 40 C 9596 RH or less no condensation Open Chassis 14 F to 113 F 10 to 45 9596 RH or less no condensation No Protective covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Drive It is recommended to remove the protective covers before operating a NEMA Type 1 Drive Models CIMR F7U2030 4055 and smaller in a panel to obtain the 113 45 ambient operating temperature Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive Make sure to install inaclean location which is free from oil mist and dust inan environment where metal shavings oil water or other foreign materials do not get into the Drive inalocation free from radioactive materials and combustible materials e g wood inalocation
69. High level voltages 3 5 to 13 2 Function set by Pulse input H6 01 Pulse input frequency reference Low level voltages Pulse I O 0 0 to 0 8 Duty Cycle on off 3096 to 70 0 to 32kHz 5 output Load 1 5 Function set by Pulse monitor H6 06 Pulse output frequency Modbus Differential input communication input PHC isolation For 2 wire RS 485 jumper and S and jumper R and S RS 485 422 Modbus communication output Differential output PHC isolation Signal common Table 2 12 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Drives Tightening Torque Screws Ib in N m AWG mm mm Recommended Wire Size AWG Possible Terminal Wire Sizes Terminals Wire Type S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 SN SC SP V V Al A2 AC 1 M2 M3 M4 5 MA MB AC AM MP R S IG Stranded 4 2 to 5 3 wire 3 0 5 to 0 6 26 to 16 0 14 to 1 5 Phoenix e Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable 7 0 to 8 8 0 8 to 1 0 20 to 14 12 E G 3 5 0 5 to 2 1 25 Use shielded twisted pair cables to wire an external speed command 2 Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability 3 Yaskawa recommends using a thin slot screwdriver with a 3 5mm blad
70. Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting os Flux Vector Vector Sa ASR Tuning on eee Gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop ASR 20 00 C5 02 ASR Integral Time 1 d 000 to 0 500 ES ASR I Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed control loop ASR 10 000 EIE Sets the speed control gain 2 and integral time 2 of the speed control loop ASR i 03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 1 00 to 20 00 ASR P Gain 2 Flux Vector 300 00 04 ASR Integral Time 2 AW ux oH heu gt 0 000 to ASR I Time 2 ESL 10 000 C5 05 ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop ASR as a ASR Limit percentage of the maximum output frequency 1 04 ASR Primary Delay Time Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the 0 000 to ae Constant torque command output 0 500 ASR Delay Time q pus ASR Gain Switching Sets the frequency for switching between Proportional Gain 1 2 C5 07 Frequency d Integral Time 1 2 ASR Gain SW Freq DECIES ASR PE RE Limit Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of 62 08 EET LM ILimit maximum output frequency 1 04 2 0200 100 Carrier Frequency Selects Drive s rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency C6 01 Drive Duty Selection See Introduction for details Heavy Normal Duty 0 Heavy Duty C6 02 0 to 1 1 Normal Duty 1 C6 02 0 to F
71. Peripheral Devices E 6 Appendix F opare Parts This appendix lists the primary spare parts that may be needed to maintain or service the Drive F7 Primary Spare Parts 208 230 240Vac F 2 F7 Primary Spare Parts 480 F 3 Spare Parts F 1 F7 Primary Spare Parts 208 230 240Vac Table F 1 208 240Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts Gwen Grem Grm Gees Dee CIMR F7U 1 2 oson NA Ercemewesmo erceisti0 Inside me Power Moule xw 1 NA ercersti0 Inside he Power Module Table F 1 208 240Vac F7 Primary Spare Parts Continued Drive Model CIMB F7U Transistor Module DC Bus Fuse Heat Sink Fan Internal Fan Spare Parts 2 F7 Primary Spare Parts 480Vac CIMR F7U 1 2PCB 7 5 5 71 617161 618390 53020 618410 510003112 D1 D2 ETC617171 ETC618390 S3020 ETC618410 SID000605 D1 D2 4045 4055 4075 4090 25 150 D A A A A A A N 25 4185 300 ETC617240 ETC618390 S3020 ETC618410 SID003119 D1 D6 50 400 NA 617250 ETC618390 S3020 ETC618410 SID003131 D1 D6
72. S7 function selection to 67 communication test mode 2 Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive 3 Jumper the following terminals while the power supply is turned OFF see diagram below Connect 5 to Connect S to R Connect 57 to SC 4 Turn ON the terminating resistor Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 5 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again Fig 0 10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self Diagnosis Function 6 During normal self diagnostic operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE Modbus communication error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact output will be turned ON and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF Communications D 18 Appendix E Peripheral Devices This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and peripheral devices Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection E 2 Branch Circuit Overload Protection E 5 Peripheral 2 6 Peripheral Devices E 1 Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given installation Use Table E 1 or E 2 when selecting fuses and circui
73. SEQ and REF REMOTE LEDs should be ON for Local mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch The Speed Command is too low If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Drive will not operate Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too large The motor s responsiveness limit may be exceeded if it is accelerated too rapidly by the Drive s stall prevention function or automatic torque boost function Increase the acceleration time CI 01 or reduce the motor load Also consider increasing the motor size B The motor only rotates one direction Reverse run prohibited may be selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run prohibited the Drive will not accept any reverse run commands Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 19 If The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor rotates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring may be incorrect When the Drive operates in the forward direction the forward direction of the motor will depend on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the motor specification The direction of motor rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U TI V T2 and W T3 If using an encoder the polarity will also have to be switched If the Motor Stalls or Accele
74. Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator AFR Normally there is no need to change this setting Adjust this parameter as follows If hunting occurs increase the set value If response is low decrease the set value Adjust the setting by 0 05 units at a time while checking the response 0 00 to 10 00 Sets the time constant to control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control Sets the time constant to control the amount of change in the speed at low speed High Slip Braking Sets how aggressively the Drive decreases the output frequency as it stops the motor using high slip braking HSB If Overvoltage OV faults occur during HSB this parameter may need to be increased Sets the maximum current to be drawn during an HSB stop Higher n3 02 settings will shorten motor stopping times but cause increased motor current and therefore increased motor heating Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1 09 Minimum Frequency at the end of deceleration If this time is set too low the machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is shut off Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault OL7 to occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during an HSB stop Normally this does not need to be adjusted Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive
75. Timed out 0 Multi function digital output status Bit 0 Multi function digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Multi function digital output 3 terminal M5 M6 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 3 to Not used 002 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037 Not used 0038H PID feedback level Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 196 without sign 0039H PID input level 100 output frequency 10 196 with sign 003AH PID output level 100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communication error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003EH setting 003FH Control method Note Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits Communications D 15 Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data Table D 6 Broadcast Data Register Operation signal Bit 0 Run command Running 1 Stopped 0 Bit 1 Run direction Reverse 1 Forward 0 Bits
76. a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Sets the sample trace for the CP 916 option board Selects the current monitor scaling when using a communication option board 0 Displayed in Amps 1 100 8192 12 bit binary number with 8192210096 Drive s rated current Selects torque reference limit when using communications option board 0 Disabled Torque reference limit from option board disabled 1 Enabled Torque reference limit from option board enabled Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 20 Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting Loop Vector Flux Vector 0to 60000 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Setting Factory Description Range Setting Open Loop Vector Digital Inputs Selects the function of terminals S3 to S8 3 wire control FWD REV selection for 3 wire sequence Local Remote Selection Closed Local Open Remote Option Inv Selection Selects source of frequency reference and sequence Closed Option Card Open b1 01 amp b1 02 Multi Step Frequency Reference 1 Based on status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 d1 16 Multi Step Frequency Reference 2 Based on status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 d1 16 Multi Function Digital Input Multi Step
77. board connected to 2CN 4 Pulse Input Terminal RP Selects the run command input source 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R 5 and 5 3 Option PCB Option board connected to 2CN Selects Drive station node number address for Modbus terminals R S S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to Modbus communications Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R 5 and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R S and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault CE is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only 4 Run at d1 04 Enables or disables the communications timeout fault CE 0 Disabled A communication loss will not cause a communication fault 1 Enabled If communication is lost for more than 2 seconds a CE fault will occur Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data to when the Drive sends data Enables or disables request to send RTS control 0 Disabled RTS
78. contact will not activate during an automatic restart attempt 1 Fault Relay Active fault contact will activate during an automatic restart attempt Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting 0 0Hz 2 0Hz 0 0Hz 2 2 0Hz Open Loop Vector Varies by Duty Rating Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0 2 For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 300 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 400 0 to 400 0 Parameters A 33 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Description Torque Detection Determines the Drive s response to an Overtorque Undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 02 and L6 03 The multi function output settings and 17 in the H2 LILI parameter group are also active if programmed 0 Disabled 1 OL3 at Speed Agree Alarm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection 2 OL3 at RUN Alarm Overtorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection 3 OL3 at Speed Agree Fault Overtorque Detection only active e Torque Detection Selection 1 E Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 Det 1 Sel 4 OL3 at RUN
79. digital output function number for channe parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number 6 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 7 Seet channe Sets the digital output function number parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 8 Seet or or channe Sets the digital output function number parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the function of the DO 08 digital output option board 0 8 channel individual outputs 1 Binary code output 2 8 channel Selected Output according to F5 01 to F5 08 settings Communications Option Setup Selects the stopping method for a communication option board fault BUS Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Selects the condition in which an EFO fault is detected from a communication option board Active only when a communication option board is installed and b1 01 or b1 02 3 0 Always detected 1 Detected only during operation Selects the stopping method for an external fault from a communication option board Active only when
80. free from harmful gases and liquids inalocation free from excessive vibration inalocation free from chlorides inalocation away from direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variation If the Drive is installed in an enclosure use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 113 F 45 C Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter During Drive installation and project construction it is possible to have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Drive To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Drive place a temporary cover over the Drive Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before start up Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Drive to overheat Physical Installation 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances Install the Drive vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency When installing the Drive always provide the following installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation and air flow Ensure that the heatsink is against a closed surface to avoid diverting cooling air around the heatsink 1 97in 1 50mm minimum 4 75in 120mm minimum 8 Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance 1 For Drive models F7U2110 F7U4160 and F7U4220 this clearance dim
81. frequency is 300kHz Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG fpo Motor speed at maximum frequency output RPM x PG rating PPR 60 g PPR Hz A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method See Fig 2 25 PG power supply 0Vdc 12Vdc Capacitor for L12Vdc momentary power loss Fig 2 25 PG X2 Connection Example For External 12V PG Power Supply Electrical Installation 2 42 Chapter 3 Digital Operator This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator Digital Operator 3 2 Digital Operator Keys d vetri eds 3 3 Drive Mode 404444 22 3 4 Drive Main 3 6 Quick Setting Menu 3 11 Programming Menu 3 12 Example of Changing a Parameter 3 15 Digital Operator 3 1 Digital Operator Display The Digital Operator is used for programming operating monitoring and copying the Drive s parameters To copy parameters F7 Drives must have the same softwa
82. function the Drive model number 02 04 software number U1 14 and control method A1 02 must match or an error will occur Allowed Selection Enables and disables the Digital Operator copy functions 03 02 0 Disabled No Digital Operator copy functions are allowed Read Allowable 1 Enabled Copying allowed Auto Tuning Selects which set of motor parameters are to be used and set during Motor Selection 1 2 Auto Tuning If Motor 2 selection 1 16 is not selected this T1 00 Select Mot parameter will not be displayed elect 1 Ist Motor El to E2 2 2nd Motor E3 to E4 Selects the Auto Tuning mode Auto Tuning mode selection 0 Rotational Auto Tuning A1 02 2 or 3 1 01 Tuning Mode Sel 1 Stationary Auto Tuning 1 02 2 3 2 Terminal resistance only stationary Auto Tuning 02 0 1 2 or 3 Set the motor rated power in kilowatts kW 0 00 to T1 02 Motor Rated Power NOTE If motor power is given in horsepower power in kW can be Mtr Rated Power 55 gt P calculated using the following formula kW Hp 0 746 255 0 240V 1 03 Set the motor rated voltage in Volts V 5 0 0to 460Vac 510 0 480V Varies Motor Rated Current aries Rated Current Motor Base Frequency Set the base frequency of the motor in Hertz Hz e motor rated current in Amperes A Rated Frequency 1 04 1 05 Number of Motor Poles Number of Poles
83. in Hz of the frequency range where field Varies weakening control is valid The field weakening command is valid Magnetic Field Frequency Field Weak Freq by Duty Rating only at frequencies above this setting and only when output frequency is in agreement with the current output frequency speed agree Magnetic Field Forcing Sets the magnetic field forcing function Function Selection 0 Disabled Otol Field Force Sel 1 Enabled 5 3423 Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during Magnetic Piel Forcing Limit magnetic field forcing A setting of 100 is equal to motor no load 10010 400 Field Force Limit current E2 03 400 Dems qp V F Pattern Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V F patterns E1 03 0 to E adjusts the levels of Drive protective features e g Overvoltage 155 0 to braking resistor turn on stall prevention etc 255 0 Input Voltage Setting WARNING 240V Input Voltage DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE 310 0 to MUST BE SET IN E1 01 FOR THE PROTECTIVE 510 0 FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY 480V FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAM AGE AND OR PERSONAL INJURY Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application The Drive operates utilizing a set V F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V F patterns to
84. is always on 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending Control Method Vector Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Uh de pas bars IMPORTANT Monitor the operation status of the Drive Set and read Drive parameters Reset faults Input multi function digital input commands Control multi function digital and analog outputs Communications D 4 An OR operation is performed between the multi function command input from the master device and the command input from multi function digital input terminals S3 to S8 Flux Vector A A A A A A Message Format In Modbus communication the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below The length of the data packet is controlled by the command function contents Slave address Function code Error check Fig D 4 Message Format The space between messages must support the following PLC to Drive Drive to PLC PLC to Drive Time Seconds d 24 bits long S E eee 24 bits long E t 5ms min setting Fig D 5 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 to 20 Hex If 0 is selected commands from the master will be broadcast i e the Drive will not return a response message Function Code The function code specifies command type There are four function cod
85. limit 0 50Hz 60Hz 60Hz 50Hz Base 72Hz 60Hz Base 50Hz VTI 50Hz VT2 60Hz VTI 60Hz VT2 50Hz HSTI 50Hz HST2 60Hz HSTI 60Hz HST2 90Hz 60Hz Base 120Hz 60Hz Base 180Hz 60Hz Base Custom V F FF Custom w o limit TMMOAWP gt FOCHADUNARWNHE These parameters are only applicable when V F Pattern Selection is set to Custom E1 03 F or FF To set V F characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner E1 04 2 E1 12 2 E1 06 E1 07 2 E1 09 E2 04 is automatically set during Auto Tuning Output voltage V 1 09 1 07 1 06 El 11 1 04 Frequency Hz Set to the motor rated power in KW This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Sets the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder pulse generator This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Start Up 4 13 Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting 2407 480V HD 40 0 to 300 0 60 0Hz 240V 480V 2 40 0 to 400 0 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 480V 0 to 255 0 240V 0 to 510 0 480V Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Description Setting Factory TA No Digital Operator Display Range Setting V F E 02 Ter
86. motor and run the Drive without the motor Output Ground Fault Motor lead was shorted to Check the motor for a phase to GF Drive output grounding current has d and or a DCCT dsh rt Ground Fault exceeded 50 of the Drive rated output on SP 559 current and L8 09 1 enabled Check the output current with a clamp on meter to verify the DCCT reading There was a broken wire in the output cable There was a broken wire in the motor winding Output Open phase The output terminals were An open phase occurred at the Drive output loose Check the wiring to the motor Check the motor for phase to ground short LF Output Phase Loss This fault is detected when output current The motor being used has a has exceeded 5 imbalance and L8 07 1 capacity less than 5 of the Check the motor and Drive enabled Drive s maximum motor capacity capacity Add impedance used Remove the motor and run the Shorted Drive output phase to Drive without the motor phase shorted motor locked Check the motor for a phase to rotor load too heavy accel hase short ded th decel time too short contactor p oC DEDE dieu Dc edd on the Drive output is opened Check the Drive for phase to Over Current overcurrent detection level approximately 2 5 or closed a special motor ora phase short at the output 200 of Drive rated output current motor with a FLA rating larger 7 Verif
87. not used strip the wires to a length of approximately 5 5mm Use shielded twisted pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal Electrical Installation 2 40 Selecting the Number of PG Encoder Pulses The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used Set the correct number for your model PG A2 PG B2 The maximum response frequency is 32 767Hz Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20kHz for the rotational speed of the motor Motor speed at maximum frequency output RPM 60 fp Hz PG rating PPR Some examples of PG output frequency number of pulses for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table 2 24 Table 2 24 PG Pulse Selection Examples Motor s Maximum Speed RPM PG Rating PPR PG Output Frequency Hz 18 000 20 000 20 000 18 000 A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method See Fig 2 24 PG power supply 0 12Vdc Capacitor for momentary power loss Signals TA3 pi Fig 2 24 PG B2 Connection Example For External 12Vdc PG Power Supply Electrical Installation 2 41 m PG D2 PG X2 PG W2 The maximum response
88. pulling down the Drive s power Repair or replace the Power PCB UV2 AOR Undervoltage of the control circuit when supplies or there was an internal Gate Drive PCB CTL PS Undervolt short in the power gate Drive running board Remove all control wiring and test Drive Cycle power to the Drive ircui Contacts on the soft charge Check the condition of the soft UV3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault contactor were dirty and the soft MC Answerback The pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor does not charge contactor Drive was running function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Description Cause Corrective Action Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 12 Operator Programming Errors OPE An Operator Programming Error OPE occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is inappropriate The Drive will not operate until the parameter is set correctly however no alarm or fault outputs will occur If an OPE occurs change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6 3 When OPE error is displayed press the ENTER key to display U1 34 OPE fault constant This monitor will display the parameter that is causing the OPE Digital Operator Display 01 kVA Selection OPE03 Terminal 05 Sequence Select 06 PG Opt Missing OPE07 Analog Selection Constant Selection Table 6 3 OPE Error Dis
89. rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 19 PG B2 Open Collector Input Wiring Sourcing PG Electrical Installation 2 34 Drive Branch O R L1 U T1 O Circuit 612 Protection us wry Power supply 12 V 4CN A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG B2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1 05 PG Rotation The factory preset is for forward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 20 PG B2 Open Collector Input Wiring Sinking PG Electrical Installation 2 35 m PG D2 The terminal specifications for the PG D2 are given in Table 2 20 Table 2 20 PG D2 Terminal Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 12Vdc 45 200mA max Power supply for pulse generator GND for power supply 5Vdc 5 200mA max Line driver input RS 422 level Pulse mput teriinals Maximum response frequency 300kHz Common terminal Pulse monitor output terminals Line driver output RS 422 level TA2 Shield connection terminal 5Vdc and 12Vdc cannot be used at the same time Wir
90. select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base levels base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through E1 13 E1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage limit 50Hz 60Hz Saturation 50Hz Saturation VE 4 aron 72Hz 60Hz Base 0 to FF 50Hz 50Hz VT2 60Hz VTI 60Hz VT2 SOHz HSTI 50Hz HST2 60Hz HSTI 60Hz HST2 90Hz 60Hz Base 120Hz 60Hz Base 180Hz 60Hz Base Custom V F FF Custom w o limit Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0 HUTIA LENDAN Parameters 14 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name id Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting mod Vector These parameters are only applicable when V F Pattern Selection Varies 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency is set to Custom 1 03 FF To set V F characteristics in by 7 Max Frequency straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case Duty the setting for E1 08 will be disregarded Be sure that the four Rating frequencies are set
91. shown in Fig 2 16 After installing an Option Board into slot C or D insert the Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising Refer to documentation provided with the Option Board for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A C and D 4 A Option Board connector 2CN C Option Board connector A Option Board mounting spacer hole A Option Board mounting spacer Provided with A Option Board Mounting spacer C Option Board Option Clip To prevent D Option Board Mounting spacer Cor D 9 Sp A Option Board Option Board Mounting spacer 3CN D Option Board connector A Option Board Note C or D Option Board lt must be mounted before mounting A Option Board Fig 2 16 Mounting Option Boards Electrical Installation 2 31 PG Encoder Feedback Board Terminal Specifications and Wiring Examples B 2 The terminal specifications for the PG A2 are given in Table 2 18 Terminal Table 2 18 PG A2 Terminal Specifications Contents Specifications 12Vdc 5 200mA max Power supply for pulse generator GND for power supply Terminals for switching between12Vdc voltage input and open collector input For open collector input short across 3 and 4 4 to 12V L max Maximum response frequency 30kHz A pha
92. signal to terminals 2 and AC Make sure the S1 2 switch and corresponding parameter H3 08 is properly set up when using terminal A2 To have the Drive receive the speed command from Modbus serial communication Set b1 01 2 and connect the RS 485 422 serial communications cable to terminals R 5 and S on the removable terminal block Make sure the 51 1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set To use an option board to input the speed command Set b1 01 3 and install a communications analog input or digital input option board into the 2CN port on the Drive control board Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communications option board If b1 01 3 but an option board is not installed in 2CN an OPEO5 Fault will be displayed on the digital IMPORTANT operator and the Drive will not run To use pulse train to input a speed command Set b1 01 4 and connect the pulse train signal to terminals RP and AC Make sure the H6 parameters are properly set Basic Programming 5 3 Run Command Source B b1 02 Run Source Selection Setting Description 398 i Operator RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator 1 Terminals Contact closure between terminal S1 and SN factory default 2 Modbus Serial Communication RS 422 485 terminals R and S Option Board Option board connected to 2CN In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE
93. storing of parameter settings as a User Initialization Selection 0 No Change 1 Set Defaults Saves current parameter settings as user initialization A1 03 now allows selecting lt 1110 gt for user initialization and returns 02 03 to zero Clear Clears the currently saved user initialization A1 03 no longer allows selecting lt 1110 gt and returns 02 03 to zero Sets the kVA of the Drive Enter the number based on Drive model number Use the last four digits of the model number CIMR F7ULILILILI This parameter only needs to be set when installing a new control board Do not change for any other reason Refer to Table 1 Determines if the Data Enter key must be used to input a frequency reference from the Digital Operator 0 Disabled Data Enter key must be reference 1 Enabled Data Enter key is not required The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the Digital Operator without having to press the data enter key pressed to enter a frequency Determines if the Drive will stop when the Digital Operator is removed when in LOCAL mode or b1 02 0 0 Disabled The Drive will not stop when the Digital Operator is removed 1 Enabled The Drive will fault OPR and coast to stop when the Digital Operator is removed Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U1 13 Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed operation timer UI 13 0 Power On
94. support please have the following materials available The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is greater than Motor Nameplate amps list with your parameter settings A sketch of the electrical powertrain from AC line to motor including filters and disconnects Field Service Start Up Assistance Factory Repair Replacement Parts and Other Support Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs Technical Training Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers at customer sites and via the internet For information visit www drives com or call 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 From the phone menu dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products then 4 for Product Training Support in Other Countries Yaskawa is a multi national company with offices and service representation around the world To obtain support always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance F Drive YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Drives Division 16555 W Ryerson Rd New Berlin WI 53151 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA 800 927 5292 Fax 262 782 3418 Internet http www drives com YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC Chicago Corporate Headquarters 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 800 YASKAWA
95. the DC bus level drops below StallP Decel Sel the stall prevention level 2 Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Range 1 02 10 3 Stall Prevention w Braking Resistor Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking Not available in Flux Vector Selects the stall prevention method to use to prevent Drive faults during run 0 Disabled Drive runs a set frequency A heavy load may cause the Drive to trip on an OC or OL fault 1 Decel Time 1 In order to avoid stalling during heavy loading Stall Prevention Selection the Drive will decelerate at Decel time 1 C1 02 if the output During Running current exceeds the level set by L3 06 Once the current level 0to2 StallP Run Sel drops below the L3 06 level the Drive will accelerate back to its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate 2 Decel Time 2 Same as setting 1 except the Drive decelerates at Decel Time 2 C1 04 When output frequency is 6Hz or less stall prevention during running is disabled regardless of L3 05 setting This parameter is enabled when L3 05 is set to 1 or 2 Stall Prevention Level Durine Runni Drive rated current is set as 100 30 to Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with 200 StallP Run Level factory setting Enables or disables OV suppression funct
96. this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If a fault or alarm is displayed on the Digital Operator refer to Table 6 1 and Table 6 2 If A Parameter Cannot Be Set Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Drive is operating Drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Remove the run command and then set the parameter Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function digital input terminal H1 01 to H1 06 If the terminal is open the Drive parameters cannot be changed Close the terminal and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting settings are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Enter the correct password in A1 04 If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Shift Reset Key and the MENU Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1 04 1 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Table 6 3 OPE Error Displays in this chapter and correct the setting BCPFOO0 or CPF01 is displayed
97. voltage limit Voltage Upper Limits for 208 240V Class Drives 250V 3 gt 5 5 3 B1200 40 Output Frequency E7U20P4 23P7 F7U24P0 2045 F7U2055 amp higher A 5V A 2 5V A 2 5V 35 20 15 For 480V class Drives the values are twice that of 208 240V class Drives Fig 5 8 V F Pattern Voltage Upper Limit Basic Programming 5 12 Table 5 2 Preset V F Patterns Specifications 1 03 V F Pattern Specifications E1 03 V F Pattern High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque 2 High Starting Torque 1 High Starting Torque High Starting Torque 2 60Hz with 50Hz Base General purpose 72Hz E 90Hz with 60 Hz Base with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 1 120Hz with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 2 High Speed Operation Variable Torque 1 Variable Torque 180Hz with 60Hz Base Variable Torque 2 When a factory initialization is performed and the setting of E1 03 F or FF E1 03 is unaffected but the IMPORTANT settings of E1 04 through E1 13 are returned to their factory default settings Basic Programming 5 13 1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Setting Range 40 0 to 400 0Hz Factory Default 60 0Hz 1 05 Maximum Output Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 230 0V 240V Models 46
98. 0 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 288 20 223 70 169 40 156 80 122 90 94 75 72 69 770 44 63 13 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E2 01 E4 01 1 90 3 30 6 20 8 50 14 00 19 60 26 60 39 7 53 0 E2 02 4 02 2 90 2 50 2 60 2 90 2 73 1 50 1 30 1 70 1 60 E2 03 E4 03 1 20 1 80 2 80 3 00 4 50 5 10 8 00 11 2 15 2 E2 05 E4 05 9 842 5 156 1 997 1 601 0 771 0 399 0 288 0 230 0 138 E2 06 E4 06 18 2 13 8 18 5 18 4 19 6 18 2 15 5 19 5 17 2 E2 10 14 26 53 77 112 172 262 245 272 E2 11 E4 07 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 3 7 5 5 7 9 11 15 12 02 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 12 03 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 12 04 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 6 L8 02 95 95 95 100 95 95 95 95 90 02 04 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Table 3 Parameter Defaults 208 240V continued ome 208 240V Model Number CIMR F7U 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 57 87 51 79 46 27 38 16 35 78 31 35 23 10 20 65 18 12 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 E2 01 E4 01 65 8 77 2 105 0 131 0 160 0 190 0 260 0 260 0 260 0 2 02 4 02 1 67 1 70 1 80 1 33 1 60 1 43 1 39 1 39 1 39 2 03 4 03 15 7 18 5 21 9 38 2 44 0 45 6 72 0 72 0 72 0 2 05 4 05 0 101 0 079 0 064 0 039 0 030 0 022 0 023 0 023 0 023 2 06 4 06 20 1 19 5 20 8 18 8 20 2 20 5 20 0 20 0 20 0 2 10 505 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200 E2 11 E4 07 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 L2 02 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 L2 03 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 5 17 12 04 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0
99. 0 0V 480V Models m 1 06 Base Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0Hz Factory Default 60 0Hz B 1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0Hz Normal Duty 0 0 to 300 0Hz Heavy Duty Factory Default 1 5Hz B 1 13 Base Voltage Setting Range 0 0 to 255 0V 240V Models 0 0 to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 0 0V 240V Models 0 0V 480V Models To set up a custom V F pattern program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1 04 through E1 13 Be sure that the following condition is true E1 09 lt E1 07 lt E1 06 E1 11 lt E1 04 Voltage Max Voltage 1 05 sees Mid Voltage 1 12 Voltage E1 1 3 Mid Voltage 1 08 Min Voltage E1 10 Et 09 E107 Et 06 E111 ET04 Frequency Min Base Max Freq FreqA Freq FreqB Freq Fig 5 9 V F Pattern Parameters Parameters E1 07 E1 08 E1 10 E1 11 and E1 12 are accessible through the Programming Menu Basic Programming 5 14 Tables 5 3 to 5 5 list the factory settings of V F patterns when V F without PG or V F with PG control method is selected A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 3 V F Pattern for Drive Capacities F7U20P4 21P5 for 200V Class Parameter Factory Setting E1 03 Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Hz Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Hz Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency
100. 0 1 67 170 1 80 1 33 1 60 1 46 1 39 1 40 E2 03 E4 03 7 6 7 8 92 10 9 191 220 240 36 0 40 0 E2 05 E4 05 0 550 0 403 0 316 0 269 0 155 0 122 0 088 0 092 0 056 E2 06 E4 06 172 20 1 23 5 20 7 18 8 19 9 20 0 20 0 20 0 E2 10 440 508 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 1760 E2 11 E4 07 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 12 02 20 2 0 20 2 0 20 20 20 2 0 2 0 12 03 0 9 1 0 1 0 11 12 12 i5 15 12 04 0 3 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 6 10 1 0 1 0 18 02 95 98 78 85 85 90 90 98 108 02 04 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 Capacity Related Parameters B 5 Table B 4 Parameter Defaults 480V continued Parameter Model Number CIMR F7U 4110 4132 4160 4185 4220 4300 b8 03 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 36 23 32 79 30 13 30 57 27 13 21 76 C6 01 0 0 0 0 1 1 E2 01 E4 01 190 0 223 0 270 0 310 0 370 0 500 0 E2 02 E4 02 1 40 1 38 1 35 1 30 1 30 1 25 E2 03 E4 03 49 0 58 0 70 0 81 0 96 0 130 0 E2 05 E4 05 0 046 0 035 0 029 0 025 0 020 0 014 E2 06 E4 06 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 20 0 E2 10 2150 2350 2850 3200 3700 4700 E2 11 E4 07 110 132 160 185 220 300 L2 02 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 1 L2 03 1 7 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 L2 04 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 L8 02 100 110 108 95 100 95 02 04 32 33 34 35 36 37 Notes Capacity Related Parameters B 6 Appendix C opecifications This appendix details the standard Drive specifications Standard Drive
101. 0 150 A A A A 0 0 to Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Forward Torque Limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse Torque Limit Torq Limit Rev Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection DB Resistor Prot Overheat Alarm Level OH Pre Alarm Lvl Overheat Pre Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre Alarm Sel L8 02 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection Ph Loss In Sel Output Phase Loss Protection Ph Loss Out Sel Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Ground Fault Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Fan On Off Sel Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Fan Delay Time Ambient Temperature Setting Ambient Temp Denotes that parameter can be changed when L8 11 L8 12 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Setting Description Range Torque Limit 0 to 300 Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque Four individual quadrants can be set 0 to 300 Output torque Positive torque No of motor Reverse E rotations 0 to 300 Forward Negative torque 0 to 300 Selects the DB protection only when using 3 duty cycle heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resistor This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the Drive 0 Not Provided 1 Provided When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this
102. 0 60Hz 3 phase 200 208 220 230Vac 50 60Hz 8 4 11 5 18 24 37 52 68 84 160 198 237 317 381 457 9 4 13 24 37 53 70 89 180 212 237 396 457 10 15 Power supply characteristics 5 DC Measures Reactor for power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Rectification Optional Built in Not possible Control characteristics The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maxi mum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430 150 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current Models 2110 4220 4300 have an overload rating of 12096 of rated output current for 60 seconds A 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification 2kHz is the Maximum carrier frequency value and default carrier frequency value for all models Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency Specifications C 2
103. 1 01 Accel Time 1 ncrease L7 01 and L7 02 Forward Reverse Torque Limits if they are low f the motor and load are connected disconnect the motor from the load ncrease C1 01 Accel Time 1 Check the input data particularly the number of PG pulses F1 01 and the number of motor poles E2 04 f the motor and load are connected disconnect the motor from the load Check that the motor is unloaded uncoupled and brake is released Check Drive wiring and mounting Check the motor connections for continuity on Drive output terminals and in motor junction box Digital Operator Display Er 13 Leakage Inductance Fault End 1 V F Over Setting End 2 Saturation End 3 Rated Alm Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and Processing continued Description Leakage Inductance Fault V F Settings Alarm Displayed after Auto Tuning is complete Motor Core Saturation Fault Detected only for rotational Auto Tuning Rated Current Setting Alarm Displayed after Auto Tuning is complete Probable Cause Auto Tuning did not finish within the set time Auto Tuning result is outside the parameter setting range The torque reference exceeded 100 and the no load current exceeded 7096 during Auto Tuning During Auto Tuning the measured values of motor iron core saturation coefficient 1 and 2 E2 07 and E2 08 exceeded its setting range A temporary value was set E2
104. 11 S1 L21 T1 L31 9 0 to 10 0 792 to 87 97 9 0 to 10 0 R LI S L2 T L3 2 1 SI L21 TI L31 154 8 to 197 5 Q2 600Vac 4 0 UL Approved 100 vinyl sheathed or equivalent 3 0 80 Application cM 25 250 125 4 0 100 Application Pependeni pn 2 0 x 2P 70 x 2P 1 0 x 2P 60 x 2P Application Dependent 2 0 em 1 p 17 6 to 22 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 77 4 to 95 0 53 8 8 to 10 8 154 8 to 197 5 17 6 to 22 5 114 to 123 1 3 to 1 4 154 8 to 197 5 17 6 to 22 5 77 4 to 95 0 8 8 to 10 8 154 8 to 197 5 17 6 to 22 5 11 4 to 123 1 3 to 1 4 154 8 to 197 5 17 6 to 22 5 77 4 to 95 0 8 8 to 10 8 276 2 to 344 8 31 4 to 39 2 11 4 to 12 3 1041 4200 0200 4400 6400 35 2 to 43 99 Application 4 0 to 5 0 Electrical Installation 2 6 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Continued Clamping Possible Wire Recommended Terminal Torque Sizes AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in mm mm 2 S L2 T L3 921 RI L11 51721 33 154 8 10 197 5 80 2P 17 6 to 22 5 2 0 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 N A 70 x 2P 77 41095 0 Application Gane m 276 2 to 344 8 4 0 EET i 11 4 to 12 3 16 N A 4 0 x 2P S L2 T L3 921 RI L11 51121 1 33 276 2 to 344 8 100 x 2P 31 4 to 39 2 3 0 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 N A 80 x 2P 77 41095 0 Application 593 8 8 to 10 8
105. 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 5 52 197 110 88 25P5 23 0 23 0 5 NA 10 47 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 27P5 31 0 31 0 1122 7 32 11 81 787 28 28 787 2 58 14 463 5 11 621 3 07 138 132 2011 45 0 46 2 NA 15 11 22 732 1220 787 28 28 787 258 1 4 463 511 621 307 138 154 2015 58 0 59 4 15 20 1319 850 1378 945 47 827 307 V4 512 579 6 65 3 94 1 73 242 2018 710 748 20 25 1319 8 50 1496 945 30 47 827 307 14 512 579 6 65 394 173 242 20P4 3 2 3 6 020797 10 47 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 20P7 41 46 10 47 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 335 473 197 110 66 21P5 7 0 7 8 1 2 2 1047 4 96 11 02 5 51 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 22P2 9 6 10 8 3 3 1047 4 96 1102 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 140 66 240V 23P7 15 0 16 8 NA 5 10 47 496 1102 551 28 28 709 232 10 552 197 110 88 25P5 23 0 23 0 5 7 5 7 5 10 47 496 11 02 551 28 28 709 232 552 197 110 88 27 5 31 0 31 0 10 10 1122 732 11 81 787 28 28 787 258 14 463 511 621 307 138 132 2011 45 0 46 2 15 15 11 22 732 1220 787 28 28 787 258 V4 463 511 621 307 138 154 2015 58 0 59 4 20 20 1319 850 1378
106. 13 F1 01 F1 12 A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these parameters is set to Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 This function is not available in flux vector control PG Gear Teeth2 1 14 detection Configures the PG open PGO function PGO will be detected if PGO Detect Time no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F1 14 See F1 02 Al 14 Setup Sets the function for channel 1 to 3 of the AI 14B analog input reference option board 0 3 channel individual Channel 1 terminal A1 Channel 2 AI 14 Input Selection terminal A2 Channel 3 terminal A3 AI 14 Input Sel 1 3 channel addition Summed values of channels 1 to 3 is the frequency reference When set to 0 select 1 for b1 01 In this case the multi function input Option Inverter selection cannot be used Sets the function of the DI 08 or the DI 16H2 digital input option board BCD 1 unit BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit DI 08 DI 16H2 Input BCD 1Hz unit Selection BCD 0 1Hz unit DI Input BCD 0 01Hz unit BCD 5 digit 0 01Hz unit only effective when DI 16H2 is used Binary input When 01 03 is set to 2 or higher the input will be BCD and the units will change to the 01 03 setting REN NECK 08 12 Setup 08 12 Channel 1 Sets the number of the monitor item to be output 1 F4 01 Monitor Selection The following settings cannot be set AO Sel 4 10 to 14 25 28 29 30 34 35 39
107. 2 AC Drive F7 Family No UL Specification No Voltage 3 phase 208 240Vac 3 phase 480Vac Fig 1 2 Drive Model Number Structure Drive Enclosure and Revision Code The SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage Drive rating enclosure type and the revision code of the Drive in alphanumeric codes The SPEC number for Drives that have custom features 1 CASE software will have a SPEC number that indicates the custom features installed Voltage 3 phase 208 240Vac 3 phase 480Vac Enclosure Type Open chassis IEC IPOO NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 Fig 1 3 SPEC Number Structure Open Chassis Type IEC IPOO Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Drive is mounted in a control panel also called protected chassis TERMS NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 The Drive is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a building not necessarily enclosed in a control panel The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 in the USA protective covers Fig 1 4 and Fig 1 6 must be installed to conform with IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements Physical Installation 1 4 Component Names Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 4 and 1 5 Top protective cover Requ
108. 2 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 3 Flux Vector Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Accepted will briefly appear Set the PG Pulses Rev of the PG Encoder to the correct value In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter F1 01 PG Pulses Rev Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys and the DATA ENTER key to set the encoder PPR Display motor speed monitor U1 05 Motor Speed in the Operation menu Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction of the machine low positive speed should be displayed PG B2 PG X2 PG W2 As the shaft is turned in reverse a low negative speed should be displayed If the speed doesn t change when the motor shaft is rotated check the encoder wiring and connections If the polarity is wrong swap and A wires terminals 4 and 5 on the PG X2 Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on Display monitor U1 01 Frequency Ref in the Operation menu A WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and h
109. 2 and 3 Not used Bit 4 External fault set using H1 01 Fault 1 Bit 5 Fault reset set using H1 02 Reset 1 Bits 6 to B Not used Bit C Multi function digital input terminal S5 input Multi function digital input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function digital input terminal S7 input Bit F Multi function digital input terminal S8 input 0002H Frequency reference 30000 10096 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously Note Refer to register 000FH bits 000CH through 000FH in Table D 4 when using bits 000CH through 000 of broadcast data registerz 0001H Enter Command When writing parameters to the Drive from the master using Modbus communication the parameters are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Drive and they will be lost if power to the Drive is shut OFF To enable these parameters in the parameter data area which is retained when power is removed use the Enter command There are two types of Enter commands Enter command that enables parameter data in RAM 2 Enter command that writes data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Drive and also enables data in RAM The following table shows the Enter command registers Enter command registers can only be written The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0910H Table D 7 Enter Command Register No 0900H Wri
110. 2018 to 4018 Unit Connection Braking Transistor Unit Connection DC link choke connection Di 20P4 to 2018 40P4 to 4018 2022 to 2110 4022 to 4300 Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Main Circuit Configurations 208 240Vac The 208 240Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 240Vac CIMR F7U20P4 to 2018 CIMR F7U2022 and 2030 oO ce c R L1 8 12 T L3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 CN Za um y 4 Power Control supply circuits Power Control supply circuits RQH ej eei QS CIMR F7U2037 to 2110 Power Control supply circuits Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives Failure to use recommended fuses circuit breakers See Appendix E may result in damage to the Drive and or personal injury 2 Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 pulse rectification circuit configuration Electrical Installation 2 9 Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac The 480Vac main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480Vac CIMR F7U40P4 to 4018 5162
111. 22 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 bps Data length 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits 1 bit selected Communications Protocol Modbus RTU Number of Connectable Units 31 units maximum Communications 0 2 Communication Connection Terminal Modbus communication uses the following terminals 5 S and R The terminating resistor must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the serial communication chain Set the terminating resistor by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 5 5 lt 81 T RS 422A Terminating eu gt or RS 485 22220 esistor F qr 2 p DIP Switch S1 located on terminal board Fig 0 2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistor 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring IMPORTANT 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cable and use proper shield clamps Shield at one end only 3 When using RS 485 communication connect S to and S to R on the control circuit terminal board See Fig D 3 below Fig D 3 RS 485 Communication Connection Procedure for Setting Up Communication Use the following procedure to perform communication with the PLC 1 Turn OFF the input to the Drive pow
112. 30 C Load factor 8096 maximum Operating time 12 hours maximum per day Maintenance 7 4 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure the cooling fan can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure mRemoving the Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan 2 Pressinon the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector See Fig 7 1 4 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan 53 Power Connector Fig 7 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure the Heatsink Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Drive 2 Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Drive Be sur
113. 30 0 ADV 4 Sin Mens Press the MENU to scroll to Programming menu Programming Digital Operator 3 15 Table 3 14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu continued er ADV Decel Time 1 0 30 0 Press the INCREASE key to display C1 02 Decel Time 1 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 C1 02 pso ose Press the DATA ENTER key to access setting display 0 0 6000 0 30 0 ADV Decel Time 1 Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right Ci 02 030 0 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Decel Time 1 C1 02 00 Press the SHIFT RESET key to move the flashing digit to the right 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec ADV Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the set data Entry Accepted is displayed for Entry Accepted 1 0 sec after the data setting has been confirmed ADV Decel Time 1 40 0 The screen returns to the C1 02 display 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec DRIVE Main Menu iiM Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Operation DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Operation menu U1 03 ADV Decel Time 1 12 1 02 00 0 0 Press the INCREASE key to increase the set data 0 0 6000 0 30 0sec Digital Operator 3 16 Chapter 4 Start Up This chapter describes the procedures to prepare the Drive for start up an
114. 31 U TI V T2 W T3 R LI 5122 T L3 1 2 B2 15 6 jd 1 8 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 Possible Wire Sizes AWG mm 1 14 to 2 to 5 5 12 to 10 3 5 to 5 5 14 to 10 2 to 5 5 E 5 5 12 to 10 3 5 to 5 5 10to 6 5 5 to 14 8106 81014 10 06 5 5 14 8102 8 to 38 A Recommended Wire Size AWG mm 2 14 2 14 2 14 2 4 2 2 3 5 2 2 3 5 2 0 5 5 2 3 5 8 10 5 5 8 8 10 5 5 6 14 8 2 5 8 8 35 2 to 43 99 8104 8 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 8 4 22 6 14 79 2 to 87 97 6 9 0 to 10 0 14 Electrical Installation 2 5 Wire Type 600 Vac UL Approved vinyl sheathed or equivalent Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Continued Clamping Possible Wire Recommended Terminal Torque Sizes AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in eue d Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol Wire Type 1 C3 SUL21 TI L31 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 79 2 to 87 97 MS 9 0 to 10 0 NEM 9 Application Dep e 1 0 50 Application e 2 0 70 79 2 to 87 97 9 0 to 10 0 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 79 2 to 87 97 9 0 to 10 0 R LI S L2 T L3 E 79 2 to 87 97 9 0 to 10 0 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 79 2 to 87 97 9 0 to 10 0 R LI S L2 T L3 CE 1 U T1 V T2 792 to 87 97 W T3 R1 L
115. 328 ft C6 02 carrier frequency setting 1 to 6 15 kHz max 1 to 4 10 kHz max 1 to 2 5 kHz max e If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds decrease the carrier frequency e fleakage current from the Drive is large decrease the carrier frequency e Ifthe audible motor noise is too great increase the carrier frequency The setting range depends on setting of parameter C6 01 Heavy Normal Duty Selection If Heavy Duty is selected 6 01 0 the Carrier Frequency Selection range is 0 Low Noise to 1 2 0 kHz If Normal Duty 1 C6 01 1 or Normal Duty 2 C6 01 2 is selected Carrier Frequency Selection range is 0 Low Noise to F Program Setting of Program allows the carrier frequency to be varied according to parameters C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit and C6 05 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Basic Programming 5 9 Preset Reference 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 41 02 Frequency Reference 2 d1 03 Frequency Reference 3 d1 04 Frequency Reference 4 Setting Range 0 0 to E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Factory Default 0 0Hz 41 17 Jog Reference Setting Range 0 0 to E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency Factory Default 6 0Hz Up to 17 preset references including Jog Reference can be set through multi function inputs S3 to S8 The first 4 preset references and Jog Reference are accessible through the Q
116. 4 to 22 6 UL Approved 14 vinyl sheathed or equivalent 3 35 2 to 43 99 4to2 30 U T1 V T2 W T3 4 0 to 5 0 22 to 38 4 22 21 99 8106 Application da os ee 4 3 5122 3 2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 amp 5 RILI S L2 T L3 1 G2 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 5 R LI S L2 T L3 Hi H2 z 4 0 to 5 0 Q2 Q2 2 miens 9 0 to 10 0 30 to 38 3 21 99 8106 Application R LI S L2 T L3 C1 2 z oc U T1 V T2 W T3 B2 MS 35 2 to 43 99 4 4 4 010 5 0 Q2 Q2 S L2 T L3 C 1 RI L11 SUL21 T1 L31 50 2 38 35 2 to 43 99 Application 4 0 to 5 0 Dependent 79 2 to 87 97 V T2 W T3 9 0 to 10 0 79 2 to 87 97 N 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 79 2 to 87 97 1 0 9 0 to 10 0 60 35 2 to 43 99 Application 4 0 to 5 0 Dependent M 79 2 to 87 97 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 Electrical Installation 2 3 N A M6 N A M8 R LI S L2 TL3 1 um 8 N A V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81 1 21 T1 L31 M6 N A 8 N A Table 2 1 208 240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Continued Clamping Possible Wire Recommended Terminal Torque Sizes Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in S L2 T L3 154 8 to 197 9 V T2 W T3 RILIL 51021 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 77 4 to 95 0 Oe EL ED 8 to 197 9 1416 R LI 512 817 21 1 31 154 8 to 197
117. 40 41 AO 08 AO 12 Channel s Sets the channel 1 gain 0 0 to Pie pans Ex Set F4 02 50 to output 100 at 5 0V output 1000 0 1000 AO Gain mea ease do P i 08 12 Channe Sets the number of the monitor item to be output 01 00 F4 03 Monitor Selection The following settings cannot be set 1 to 45 3 A AO Ch2 Sel 4 10 to 14 25 28 29 30 34 39 40 41 AO 08 AO 12 Channe Sets the channel 2 gain 0 0 to F4 04 Gain Ex Set F4 04 50 to output 100 at 5 0V output 1000 0 50 0 AO Ch2 Gain ee 2 Sets the channel 1 bias 100 10V 110 010 AO Chl Bias Ex Set F4 05 50 to output 096 at 5 0V output 110 0 AO 08 AD 12 Chantie Sets the channel 2 bias 100 10V 110 0to MEE Ex Set F4 06 50 to output 0 at 5 0V output 00 AO Ch2 Bias x Set F4 06 50 to output 0 at 5 0V output AO 12 Channel 1 Signal Sets the range of the voltage output F4 07 Level 0 0 to 10Vdc 0 A AO Opt Level Ch1 1 10 to 10Vde AO 12 Channel 2 Signal Sets the range of the voltage output F4 08 Level 0 0 to 10Vdc 0 A AO Opt Level Ch2 1 10 to 10Vde Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 19 Parameter No ECCE DO 02 08 Setup Parameter Name Digital Operator Display DO 02 DO 08 Channel 1 Output Selection DO Chi Select DO 02 DO 08 Channel 2 Output Selection DO Ch2 Select DO 08 Channel 3 Out Selection DO Ch3 Select DO 08 Channel 4
118. 6 Reference 6 Freq uency Reference 7 Reference 7 Freq uency Reference 8 Reference 8 Freq uency Reference 9 Reference 9 Freq uency Reference 10 Reference 10 Freq uency Reference 11 Reference 11 Freq uency Reference 12 Reference 12 Freq uency Reference 13 Reference 13 Freq uency Reference 14 Reference 14 Freq uency Reference 15 Reference 15 Freq uency Reference 16 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Preset Reference Frequency reference when multi unction in put Multi ste reference 1 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi unction in put Multi ste reference 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi reference 1 2 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi unction in unction in put Multi ste s are affected by 1 03 put Multi ste reference 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi reference 1 3 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi reference 2 3 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi reference 1 2 3 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi unction in unction in unction in unction in put Multi ste s are affected by 01 03 put Multi ste s are affected by o1 03 put Multi ste put Mul
119. 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 L8 02 100 90 90 95 100 105 110 100 95 02 04 9 A B C D E F 10 11 Capacity Related Parameters B 4 Table B 4 Parameter Defaults 480V Model Number CIMR F7U 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P7 44 0 45P5 47 5 4011 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 b8 04 576 40 44740 33880 31360 24580 23644 189 50 145 38 140 88 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E2 01 E4 01 1 00 1 60 3 10 4 20 7 00 7 00 9 80 13 30 19 9 E2 02 E4 02 2 90 2 60 2 50 3 00 2 70 2 70 1 50 1 30 1 70 E2 03 E4 03 0 60 0 80 140 1 50 2 30 2 30 2 60 4 00 5 6 E2 05 E4 05 38198 22459 10 100 6 495 3 333 3 333 1 595 1 152 0 922 E2 06 E4 06 182 143 183 18 7 193 193 182 15 5 19 6 E2 10 14 26 53 77 130 130 193 263 385 E2 11 E4 07 04 0 75 L5 22 3 7 4 0 5 5 7 5 12 02 01 0 1 02 0 3 0 5 0 5 0 8 0 8 1 0 12 03 0 1 02 0 3 04 0 5 0 6 0 6 0 7 0 8 12 04 0 3 0 3 0 3 03 0 3 0 3 03 0 3 03 18 02 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 02 04 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Table B 4 Parameter Defaults 480V continued PORA Model Number CIMR F7U 4015 4018 4022 4030 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 2 00 2 00 2 00 b8 04 126 26 115 74 103 58 92 54 76 32 71 56 67 20 46 20 38 91 C6 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E2 01 E4 01 26 5 32 9 38 6 52 3 65 6 79 7 95 0 130 0 156 0 E2 02 E4 02 1 6
120. 7 Control circuit failure damage Cycle power to the Drive ASIC Internal RAM Fault Control circuit damage Replace the Drive CPF08 Control circuit failure damage Cycle power to the Drive 9 Control circuit failure damage Cycle power to the Drive CPU Err CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Control circuit damage Replace the Drive mur ASIC Version Fault Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Option board input fault Remove all inputs to the option board Watchdog Timer Fault WAT Err 5 Control circuit damage Replace the Drive Perform a factory initialization CPF20 Option Card Fault Option A D Error Cycle power to the Drive Option card A D convert fault Replace the option board Replace the control board Perform a factory initialization CPF21 Noise or spike was on the Cycle power to the Drive Option CPU D Self diagnosis Fault of Option Board communication line and or own defective option board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove any option boards Cycl to the Drive CPF22 Unrecognizable option board Option Board Code Number Fault was connected to the control Perform a factory initialization Option Type Err board Replace the option board Replace the control board Remove power to the Drive An option board was not Reconnect the option board boa oran option Perform a factory initialization CPF23 Option
121. 8 01 03 Output Current sees 3 8 01 04 Control Method 3 8 01 05 Motor Speed 3 8 U1 06 Output Voltage 3 8 01 07 DC Bus Voltage 3 8 01 08 Output Power eee 3 8 01 09 Torque Reference 3 8 01 10 Input Terminal Status 3 8 01 11 Output Terminal Status 3 8 Index 3 01 12 Drive Operation Status 3 8 01 13 Cumulative Operation Time 3 8 01 14 Software Number esee 3 8 01 15 Terminal Input Voltage 3 8 01 16 Terminal A2 Input Voltage 3 8 01 17 Terminal Input Voltage 3 8 01 18 Motor Secondary Current 3 8 01 19 Motor Excitation Current 3 8 01 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start 3 8 01 21 ASR Input 3 8 UT 22 ASR Output 3 8 01 24 PI Feedback Value 3 8 01 25 DI 16 H2 Input Status 3 8 01 26 Output Voltage Reference 3 8 01 27 Output Voltage Reference 3 8 01 28 CPU Number e 3 8
122. 800 927 5292 Fax 847 887 7310 Internet http www yaskawa com MOTOMAN INC 805 Liberty Lane West Carrollton OH 45449 U S A Phone 937 847 6200 Fax 937 847 6277 Internet http www motoman com YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION New Pier Takeshiba South Tower 1 16 1 Kaigan Minatoku Tokyo 105 0022 Japan Phone 81 3 5402 4511 Fax 81 3 5402 4580 Internet http www yaskawa co jp YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo SP Brasil CEP 04304 000 Phone 55 11 5071 2552 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 Internet http www yaskawa com br YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 888 301 MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB 504 38525 Torsas Sweden hone 46 486 48800 Fax 46 486 41410 UD MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH ammerfeldstrabe 1 85391 Allershausen Germany hone 49 8166 900 Fax 49 8166 9039 DA YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF Scotland United Kingdom Phone 44 12 3673 5000 Fax 44 12 3645 8182 YEA Document Number TM F7 01 10 15 2004 YASKAWA YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION Paik Nam Bldg 901 188 3 1 Ga Euljiro Joong Gu Seoul Korea Phone 82 2 776 7844 Fax 82 2 753 2639 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD Head Office 151 Lorong Chuan 04 01 New Tech Park Singapore 556741 Singapore Phone 65 282 3003 Fax 65 289 3003 TAIPEI OFFICE A
123. 9 17 6 to 22 5 Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol io Application 8 8 to 10 8 Dependent 5 1 25 300 150 U T1 V T2 W T3 77 4 to 95 0 3 Creig 125 Application Dependent 4 8 to 197 9 MIO d 23 11 4 to r 1 4 62 13 to R L1 S L2 TIL3 381 U T1 V T2 W T3 54 8 to a RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 77 4 to 95 0 ERE 5 1 25 1 0 2 60 X 2P Application Dependent 54 8 to 197 9 MIO 17 6 to 225 a 410 r 1 4 62 4 0 X 2P S L2 T L3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 154 8 to 197 9 100 X 2P 600Vac NIS U T1 V T2 W T3 17610223 O ak vinyl sheathed 60 1 25 80 X 2P or equivalent 3 0 X 2P 80 X 2P Application Dependent 3 0 80 e 31 4 to 39 2 Taon 8 8 to 10 8 zD 31 4 to 39 2 Tren 1 3 to 14 r 1 4 62 S L2 T L3 CE RLU 817121 TU L31 1 25 250 X2P 125 X 2P 4 0 X 2P 100 X 2P Application Dependent 2 0 X 2P 70 X 2P 276 2 to 344 8 U T1 V T2 W T3 G14193932 R L1 S L2 T L3 RULIL SUL21 TI L31 714 to 95 0 8 8 to 10 8 276 2 to 344 8 31 4 to 39 2 11 4 to 123 1 3 to 1 4 276 2 to 344 8 31 4 to 39 2 1 25 350 X 2P 200 X 2P 300 X 2P 150 X 2P Application Dependent 300 X 2P 150 X 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 77 4 to 95 0 8 8 to 10 8 276 2 to 344 8 31 4 to 39 2 11 4 to 12 3 vtae a25 Wire size range p
124. A3 Gain Setting 0 0 to Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input 1000 0 100 0 H3 07 Terminal A3 Bias Setting 2 T Terminal Bias Sets the frequency reference when is input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selects the signal level of terminal A2 8 0 0 to 10Vdc switch S1 2 must be in the OFF position H3 08 Selection 3 d 2 1 10 to 10Vdc switch 51 2 must be in the OFF position Term A2 Signal E 2 4 to 20mA switch S1 2 must be in the ON position H3 09 dn Selects the function of terminal A2 Same choices as Terminal A3 Function Selection H3 05 Terminal A2 Sel H3 10 Terminal A2 Gain Setting 0 0 to E X Terminal A2 Gain Sets the output level when 10V is input 1000 0 100 096 EIE 5 Terminal A2 Bias Setting Sets the output level when OV is input Terminal A2 Bias 4100 0 Analog Input Filter Time PT Mu e 2426 52 H3 12 Constant This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs Increase to 0 00 to 0 03sec A A A A add stability decrease to improve response 2 00 Filter Avg Time Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 28 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Analog Outputs Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM and FC 1 Frequency Reference 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 2 Output Frequency 00 Maximum output frequency
125. ART UP PREPARATION Start Up 4 4 Drive Start Up Procedures O 1 Confirm that all three phases are present and that the input voltage is correct for the Drive being set up Measure the voltage on the line side of the Drive s Molded Case Circuit Breaker disconnect and record below Table 4 1 Input Voltage Check Measurement Location Voltage Vac 11 12 11 13 O 2 Ifthe voltage level is within the Drive s specification APPLY POWER to energize the Drive The STOP AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators should be lit on the keypad 3 REMOVE POWER from the Drive Wait for the Red CHARGE LED near the power terminals to go out 4 Connect the motor leads to the Drive at terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 5 APPLY POWER to the Drive 6 Determine the proper control method for the application V F Control V F with PG Control Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector Control O 7 Ifthe selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor V F with PG Control and Flux Vector Control verify that the proper PG card is installed in the Drive and that all encoder wiring is correct Check the line driver type 8830 88C30 output levels quadrature A A B B etc and encoder PPR pulses per revolution Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for details 8 Proceed to the correct Control Method Start up Procedure Table 4 2 Control Method Start up Procedure V F Start up w PG Feedback w PG St
126. Auto Tuning Parameter List Auto Tuning Parameters Control Method V F w PG Flux Vector T1 01 Tuning Mode Selection T1 02 Motor Rated Power T1 03 Rated Voltage X After setting Auto Tuning parameters according to motor nameplate specifications press so that the following screen appears on the Digital Operator A TUNE Rdy Auto Tuning OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready Press RUN key Press the RUN key on the Digital Operator to start Auto Tuning The motor will automatically run During this process the motor parameters will be automatically set in the Drive according to the measured values Digital Operator 14 Example of Changing a Parameter Table 3 14 provides an example of how to change parameter 1 02 Deceleration Time 1 from 30 seconds to 40 seconds Table 3 14 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu er DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref UI WES vu The Drive is first powered up U1 02 U1 03 0 00A DRIVE Main Menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Operation menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Press the MENU key to scroll to Quick Setting menu Quick Setting ADV Initialization Press the DATA ENTER key to enter Programming menu Select Language ADV Accel Decel Press the INCREASE key until C1 01 Accel Decel is displayed Accel Time 1 ADV Accel Time 1 Press the SHIFT RESET key to move flashing digit to the right 0 0 6000 0
127. Board Interconnection Fault Option DPRAM Err board that was not made for Cycle power to the Drive the Drive was attached to the control board Replace the option board Replace the control board Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 3 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display The load is locked Reduce the load The acceleration or Lengthen the acceleration time deceleration time is too short and deceleration time Excessive Speed Deviation The load is too large Check the mechanical system Detected when F1 04 0 to 2 and in Flux ME i DEV Vector control method A1 02 3 i Check the settings in F1 10 and EM 1 11 not appropriate for Speed Deviation The speed deviation is greater than the setting in F1 10 for a time longer than the the application setting in F1 11 Braking mechanism is Check that the brake is released engaged when using brake motor Encoder wiring and or encoder Check for proper encoder wiring settings F1 group are and verify the parameter settings incorrect are correct Check for an external condition Option Board External Fault Verify the parameters Opt External present Verify communication signal EF3 Ext Fault S3 EF4 Ext Fault S4 EF5 External Fault at Terminal 53 S8 Ext Fault S5 Detected when terminals 53 S8 H1 01 to An external f
128. CHES TOP AND BOTTOM DR BY EK 03 12 03 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN HEAVY DUTY HD AND NORMAL DUTY ND IS THE RATED HORSEPOWER REV JCM 03 17 03 RATED OUTPUT CURRENT AND THE OVERLOAD CAPACITY PARAMETER C6 01 MUST BE SET TO VALUE OF 0 JAC 03 17 03 FOR HEAVY DUTY AND 2 FOR NORMAL DUTY FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING IS HEAVY DUTY 6 01 0 APPVL un Physical Installation 1 7 DIMENSIONS F7 NEMA 1 208 240V F7U2022 2030 480V F7U4022 4055 H2 UU e e SDN D iom nS LT H I MOUNTING HOLES FOR A SIZE SCREWS E SIZE K HOLE 2 HOLES SIZE L 2 HOLES SIZE J a b ERI RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM WEIGHT INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT HP MOUNTING LBS HD ND AMPS HD ND HI wi H Ww H2 2 D D1 A B E G J K L 2022 85 88 25 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 10 00 0 30 1 16 10 24 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 173 591 244 1 97 130 53 208V 2030 115 115 30 40 17 13 8 66 24 21 10 98 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 244 1 97 1 10 59 240V 2022 85 88 30 30 15 16 7 68 21 06 10 00 0 30 1 16 1024 3 94 1 4 4 98 6 50 7 87 1 73 5 91 244 1 97 1 10 53 2030 115 115 40 40 17 13 8 66 24 21
129. CLOSED stopped when OFF Reverse run stop command Reverse run when CLOSED stopped when OFF External fault input Fault when CLOSED Fault reset Reset when CLOSED Multi step speed reference 1 Master auxiliary switch Auxiliary frequency reference when CLOSED Multi function digital inputs Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step setting 2 when CLOSED Functions set by 1 01 to H1 06 Jog frequency reference Jog frequency when CLOSED External baseblock N O Shuts off Drive s output when CLOSED Signal Level 24Vdc 8mA Photocoupler isolation Digital input supply common Digital input photocoupler Digital input supply 24Vdc Refer to Table 2 15 for connection details Analog Input Signals 15Vdc power output 15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters 15Vdc Max current 20mA 15Vdc power output 15Vdc power supply for analog inputs or transmitters 15Vdc Max current 20mA Analog input or speed command 0 to 10Vdc 100 10Vdc 100 H3 01 0 to 10V 20kQ Add to terminal Al Multi function analog input 2 Function set by H3 09 4 to 20mA 100 to 10Vdc 100 H3 08 4 to 20mA 250Q 0 to 10V 20kQ Aux frequency reference 1 Multi function analog input 3 Function set by H3 05 0 to 10Vdc 100 to 10Vdc 100 H3 04 0 to 10V 20kQ
130. CN status Communications D 11 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Fault content 2 Bit 0 External fault 3 EF3 Bit 1 External fault 4 EF4 Bit 2 External fault 5 5 Bit 3 External fault 6 EF6 Bit4 External fault 7 EF7 Bit 5 External fault 8 EF8 Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Overspeed OS Bit 8 Speed deviation DEV Bit 9 PG open PGO Bit A Input phase loss PF Bit B Output phase loss LF Bit C DCCT fault CF Bit D Operator disconnect OPR Bit E EEPROM write in fault ERR Bit F Not used Fault content 3 Bit 0 Modbus communication error CE Bit 1 Bus error BUS Bit 2 E 15 SI F G communications error E 15 Bit 3 E 10 SI F G fail Bit 4 Control fault CF Bit 5 Zero servo fault SVE Bit 6 External fault EFO Bits 7 to F Not used CPF content 1 Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 CPF02 fault Bit 3 fault Bit4 CPF04 fault Bit 5 CPF05 fault Bit 6 CPF06 fault Bits 7 toF Not used CPF content 2 Bit 0 CPF20 fault Bit 1 CPF21 fault Bit 2 CPF22 fault Bit 3 CPF23 fault Bits 4 to Not used Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits Communications D 12 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Alarm content 1 Bit 0 Undervolt
131. Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure Maintenance 7 6 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card The terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the control wiring Always confirm that input power is removed and the Charge LED is not lit before removing or mounting the terminal card IMPORTANT mRemoving the Terminal Card 1 Remove the terminal cover on the Drive 2 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover from the Drive 3 Remove the wires connected to FE and or NC on the terminal card 4 Loosen the mounting screws on the left and right sides of the terminal card until they are free It is not necessary to remove the mounting screws completely They are captive and self rising 5 Pull the terminal card out in the direction of the block arrow mMounting the Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal card and the Control PCB properly meet at connector 8 before insertion The connector pins may be damaged if the terminal card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Drive operation Mounting Mounting 2 Screw Screw Fig 7 3 Terminal Card Removal Procedure Maintenance 7 7 Notes Maintenance 7 8 Appendix A Parameters This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names along with a description of each The abbreviated name as it appears on the Digital Operator display keypad is shown in bold ty
132. E1 04 Output Current 00 Drive rated current Motor Speed 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 6 Output Voltage 00 200 400Vac depending on Drive voltage rating DC Bus Voltage 00 400 800Vdc depending on Drive voltage rating Output kWatts 00 Drive rated power 9 Torque Reference 00 Motor rated torque 15 Terminal A1 Input Level 00 10Vdc Terminal A2 Input Level 00 10Vdc or 20mA 17 Terminal A3 Input Level 00 10Vdc 18 Motor Secondary Current 00 Motor rated secondary current 19 Motor Excitation Current 00 Motor rated magnetizing current 20 SFS Output 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 ASR Input 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 22 ASR Output 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 24 PID Feedback 00 Maximum output frequency E1 04 26 Output Voltage Reference Vq 100 E1 05 default 240V or 480V 27 Output Voltage Reference Vd 100 E1 05 default 240V or 480V 31 Not Used 32 ACR q Output 100 Motor rated secondary current 33 ACR d Output 100 Motor rated magnetizing current 36 PID Input 100 Maximum output frequency 1 04 37 PID Output 100 Maximum output frequency 1 04 38 PID Setpoint 100 Maximum output frequency 1 04 44 ASR Output Without Filter 45 Feedforward Control Output 100 Motor rated secondary current Description 3 5 7 8 16 Terminal Monitor Selection Terminal FM Sel 21 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting
133. Enclosure Heat Loss and Weight Input Voltage 3 Phase 208 240Vac 208 230Vac 480 Vac Table 1 1 F7 Model Number Weight Enclosure Style Ib kg 6 6 3 0 8 8 4 0 CIMR F7U23P7 NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U25P5 NEMA Type 1 IP20 MR F7U2011 NEMA Type 1 IP20 15 4 7 0 82 24 2 11 0 IMR IMR F7U2015 NEMA Type 1 IP20 IMR F7U2018 NEMA Type 1 IP20 I I I I I I n C C C F7 Model Number and Enclosure Style Heat Loss watts tal 58 3 332 525 208 680 416 472 CIMR FTU2022 NEMA TypeT P20 5500 CIMR F7U2030 NEMA Type 1 IP20 59 27 1216 CIMR F7U2037 CIMR F7U2045 CIMR F7U2055 CIMR F7U2075 CIMR F7U2090 CIMR F7U2110 CIMR F7U40P4 CIMR F7U40P7 CIMR F7U41P5 CIMR F7U42P2 CIMR F7U43P7 CIMR F7U44P0 6630 CIMR FTUASPS CIM FTUATPS CIMR F7UA01 CIMK FTUIDIS CIMICETUADIS CIMR F704022 CIMR F704030 CIMR F7U4037 NEMA Type 1 IP20 CIMR F7U4045 CIMR F7U4055 CIMR F7U4075 CIMR F7U4090 CIMR F7U4110 CIMR F7U4132 CIMR F7U4160 CIMR F7U4185 CIMR F7U4220 CIMR F7U4300 13 2 6 0 22 10 53 24 88 40 Physical Installation 1 2 14 39 53 114 232 158 389 201 801 465 590 653 Confirmations upon Delivery Receiving Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive is received Table 1 2 Receiving Checks Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Drive Reconcile with packing slip and or or
134. Fault Overtorque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault 5 UL3 at Speed Agree Alarm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection 6 UL3 at RUN Alarm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection 71 UL3 at Speed Agree Fault Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault 8 UL3 at RUN Fault Undertorque Detection is always active Torque Detection Level 1 and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault L602 Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque Detection Time 1 pos Torq Det 1 Time Sets the Overtorque Undertorque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or torque for torque detection 1 Current detection for A1 02 0 or 1 Torque detection for A1 02 2 or 3 Sets the length of time an Overtorque Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 1 recognized by the Drive Determines the Drive s response to an Overtorque Undertorque condition Overtorque and Undertorque are determined by the settings in parameters L6 05 and L6 06 The multi function output settings 18 and 19 in the 2 0 parameter group are also active if programmed 0 Disabled 1 OL4 at Speed Agree Alarm Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection 2 OL4 at RUN Alarm Overtorque Detection is always
135. Ferraz A60Q10 2 600V 10A Ferraz 070 006 13 700 6 Ferraz 700516 14 690 16 41P5 Ferraz A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC14 51 25 690V 25A Ferraz 700520 14 690 20 42P2 Ferraz A60Q15 2 600V 15A Ferraz 700525 22 700V 25 Ferraz 700520 14 690 20 43 7 Ferraz 60020 2 600 20 Ferraz 700520 14 700 20 Ferraz 700525 14 690 25 44 0 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30 Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Ferraz 700540 14 690 40 45 5 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30 Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Ferraz 700540 14 690 40 47 5 Ferraz 60030 2 600V 30 Ferraz 700540 14 700 40 401 Ferraz 70 50 4 700 50 Ferraz 500550 4 500 50 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A 4015 Ferraz A70P70 4 700 70A Ferraz A50QS80 4 500V 80A Bussmann FWH 100B 500V 100A 4018 Ferraz 70 80 4 700 80 Ferraz 5005100 4 500 100 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4022 Ferraz 70 80 4 700 80 Ferraz 5005100 4 500 100 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V 125A 4030 Ferraz 70 100 4 700 100 Ferraz 5005125 4 500 125 Bussmann FWH 125B 500V
136. Frequency Reference 3 Terminal S3 Function Based on status of Multi Step Reference 1 to 4 d1 16 01 0 to 78 Selection Jog Frequency Reference Terminal S3 Sel Closed frequency reference from d1 17 Accel Decel Time Selection 1 Based on status of Accel Decel Time Selection 1 and 2 External BaseBlock N O Closed Output transistors forced off Open Normal operation External BaseBlock N C Closed Normal operation Open Output transistors forced off Acc Dec Ramp Hold Closed Acceleration suspended and speed held External Overheat Alarm OH2 Closed OH2 alarm Terminal A2 Enable Closed Terminal A2 is active Open Terminal A2 is disabled V F Control with PG Disabled Closed Speed feedback control disabled ASR Integral Reset Closed Integral reset Terminal Not Used Terminal closure has no effect MOP Increase Closed frequency reference increases Open frequency reference held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1 01 Multi Function Digital Input must be set to 1 1 02 Terminal S4 Function MOP Decrease Selection Closed frequency reference decreases 0 to 78 Terminal S4 Sel Open frequency reference held Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1 01 must be set to 1 Forward Jog Closed Drive runs forward at frequency reference entered into parameter 41 17 Reverse Jog Closed Drive runs in reverse at frequency reference entered into parameter 41 17
137. If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the motor The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the motor can be checked with a digital multi meter 230 240Vac Cooling Fans Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Heat Sink Measure across the fan motor terminals If the fan motor is good the measured value should be about 5000 If OQ are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite ohms are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open If the fan is not working then disconnect the fan and apply 230 240Vac to the fan to test the motor Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse It is located on either the Gate Drive Board 3PCB or the Tap Change Board 8PCB If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open then the 230 240 Vac cooling fans may be defective Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Cooling Fan Fuse y Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse If the fuse is good the measured value will be OQ If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite Drive Date Stamp Information This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period The date stamp is locate
138. If using an optional external power supply ensure it is a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source 5 Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Prepare cable ends as shown in Fig 2 12 6 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G 7 Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Shield sheath Insulation Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath terminal E G at Drive Insulate with tape Fig 2 12 Preparing the Ends of Twisted pair Cables Control Circuit Wire Sizes For remote operation keep the length of the control wiring to 50m or less Separate the control wiring from high power lines input power motor leads or relay sequence circuits to reduce noise induction from peripheral devices When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown above Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 12 Wiring Checks After all wiring is completed perform the following checks 1 Is all wiring correct 2 Have all wire clippings screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive enclosure 3 Are all terminal screws tight Electrical Installation 2 24 Field Wiring Diagram Use this diagram to document field wiring It may be helpful to copy this page 1 5 2 2 S3
139. L3 04 1 the standard stall prevention function is enabled If during deceleration the DC Bus voltage exceeds the stall prevention level see table below the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed Once the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level deceleration will continue Fig 5 11 demonstrates deceleration when L3 04 1 Drive Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration 240Vac 380Vdc 01 gt 760Vd 480Vac E1 01 2 400Vac c 1 01 lt 400 660Vdc a Set decel time b Decel time is extended Output Frequency DC Bus Voltage 380 660 760Vdc Fig 5 11 Stall Prevention If L3 04 2 the intelligent stall prevention function is enabled The active deceleration time is used as a starting point and the Drive will attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level The fastest time possible is 1 10 the active deceleration time If L3 04 3 the stall prevention with braking resistor function is enabled The DC bus voltage level is controlled during fast deceleration and allows for a faster than normal deceleration time Use this setting with a braking resistor when overvoltage fault OV sometimes occurs even under settings 1 or 2 IMPORTANT In Flux Vector Control Mode 1 02 3 setting stall prevention with DB resistor L3 04 3 cannot be done Basic Programming 5 22 Chapter 6 Diagnostics
140. Link Choke by Others Shorting Bar Standard CIMR F7U20P4 to 2018 MCCB CIMR F7U40P4 to 4018 pis Sa OO 000 0 L1 3 Phase PER Q2 Qs B2 PowerSupply L2 5 12 000 94 50 60Hz Motor um 1 11 7 Ti Remove Jumpers V T2 T2 IM if using 12 pulse oa CQ 81121 wis Js 1 131 f um N Foward Run Stop Digital Inputs 1 2 m 9f 24Vdc d Reverse Run Stop 62 External Fault 2 Wire S3 1 01 Digital Output 1 Control Fault Reset Q gt Fault Contact 54 1 02 MC 250Vac 1A n Multi Step Ref 1 Q Multi function e S5 H1 03 Digital Inputs 3 8 Multi Step Ref 2 24Vdc 8mA e S6 H1 04 4 Jog Reference S7 H1 05 H2 01 Baseblock S8 4H1 06 M3 amp Multi function SN H2 02 M4 Digital Outputs 2 4 O 250Vac 30Vdc 1A 5 5 A O SP 24Vdc H2 03 A E G E G Multi function t 2 15 10 20mA Analog Outputs 1 2 2kQ f to 10 2 V 10 H4 01 FM Q V 15Vdo 10 20mA H4 01 dimi in A1 010 4 10Vdc 20 H3 01 9 Bit Resolution External H4 04 AM N 9 4 89 Accuracy Frequency lt 4 A2 440 20 2500 S1 2 ON Reference 0 to 4 10Vdc 20kO 51 2 OFF lan Multi function Multi function Analog Input1 H3 09 6 06 gt Pulse Output 4
141. Lower Fig D 7 Function Code 06H Message Example Communications D 8 Response Message During Error Slave address 01H 80H Function code 86H Higher 82H Loopback Test 08H The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave Set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive Command Messade Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 88H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Fig D 8 Function Code 08H Message Example Write In Several Holding Registers 10H Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage register address order The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command and a speed command of 60 0Hz has
142. MR F7U Rating A 44 0 45 5 15 47 5 10 om s om os pow m 8 39 ow pom 039 09 9 99 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND ratings Peripheral Devices E 3 Table Semiconductor Fuses for Drive 121 Protection and Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection 200V Series Drive Recommended Alternate 1 Alternate 2 ModelNo CIMR F7 Model Rating Fuse Mfr Model No Fuse Mfr Model No Ferraz A60Q12 2 600V 12A Ferraz A070GRBOO06T 13 700V 6A Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500V 20 Ferraz 60012 2 600V 12A Ferraz 070 006 13 700V 6 Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500V 20A Ferraz 60015 2 600 15A Ferraz 700525 22 700A 25 Bussmann FWH 20A14F 500V 20 Ferraz A60Q20 2 600V 20A Ferraz 6 900CPGRC14 51 25 690V 25A Bussmann FWH 25A14F 500V 25A Ferraz A60Q30 2 600V 30A Ferraz 700532 14 700 32 Bussmann FWH 45B 500V 45A Ferraz 50 50 4 500V 50A Ferraz 700550 14 700 50A Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A Ferraz 50 80 4 500V 80A Ferraz 500570 4 500 70 Bussmann FWH 80B 500V 80A Ferraz 50 80 4 500V 80A Ferraz A50QS100 4 500V 100A Bussmann FWH 100B 500V 100A Ferraz 50 125 4 500V 125A Ferraz 5005 150 4
143. Motor 2 Mid Output E3 05 Frequency Mid Frequency 400 0 Motor 2 Mid Output Voltage oon E396 E307 E305 E304 E302 Mid Voltage 2106 480V Frequency Hz Motor 2 Minimum Output E3 07 To set V F characteristics in a straight line set the same values for in requency E3 05 and E3 07 In this case the setting for E3 06 will be disregarded Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the 0 0 to M 2 Mini following manner or else an 10 fault will occur 255 0 Otor Quiput E3 02 gt E3 04 gt E3 05 gt E3 07 240V E3 08 Voltage Min Voltage 0010 510 0 480V E Motor Setup 2 Motor 2 Rated Current Set to the motor 2 nameplate full load current in amperes A Motor Rated FLA This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Motor 2 Rated Slip Set to the rated slip of motor 2 in hertz Hz Motor Rated Slip This value is automatically set during rotational Auto Tuning Motor 2 No Load Current Set to the magnetizing current of motor 2in percentage of full load current E4 01 This value is automatically set during rotational No Load Current Auto Tuning Motor 2 Number of Poles Set to the number of poles of motor 2 Number of Poles This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Motor 2 Line to Line Resistance Term Resistance Set to the phase to phase resistance of motor 2 in ohms Q 0 000 to This value is automatically set by the Auto Tuning 65 000 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance
144. ND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION 10F 146 Sung Chiang Road Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2563 0010 Fax 886 2 2567 4677 YASKAWA JASON HK COMPANY LIMITED Rm 2909 10 Hong Kong Plaza 186 191 Connaught Road West Hong Kong Phone 852 2803 2385 Fax 852 2547 5773 BEIJING OFFICE Room No 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club 21 Jianguomanwai Avenue Beijing 100020 China Phone 86 10 6532 1850 Fax 86 10 6532 1851 SHANGHAI OFFICE 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6553 6600 Fax 86 21 6531 4242 SHANGHAI YASKAWA TONJI M amp E CO LTD 27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China Phone 86 21 6533 2828 Fax 86 21 6553 6677 BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO LTD 30 Xue Yuan Road Haidian Beijing 100083 China Phone 86 10 6232 9943 Fax 86 10 6234 5002 SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO LTD 7 Yongchang North Street Beijing Economic amp Technological Development Area Beijing 100076 China Phone 86 10 6788 0551 Fax 86 10 6788 2878 YEA TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN B1 6F No 51 Section 2 Kung Yi Road Taichung City Taiwan R O C Phone 886 4 2320 2227 886 4 2320 2239 Rev 04 10 Data subject to change without notice Yaskawa Electric America Inc
145. Out Selection DO Ch4 Select DO 08 Channel 5 Out Selection DO Ch5 Select DO 08 Channel 6 Out Selection DO Ch6 Select DO 08 Channel 7 Out Selection DO Ch7 Select DO 08 Channel 8 Out Selection DO Ch8 Select DO 08 Output Mode Selection DO 08 Selection Operation Selection after Communication Error Comm Bus Fit Sel Selection of External Fault from Communication Option Board EFO Detection Stopping Method for External Fault from Communication Option Board 0 Fault Action Trace Sampling from Communications Option Board Trace Sample Tim Current Monitor Display Unit Selection Current Unit Sel Torque reference torque limit selection from communications option Torq Ref Lmt Sel Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Sets the digital output function number annell Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 2 Seet Or C Sets the digital output function number for channe parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used Sets the digital output function number 3 Seet parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 4 Seet or channe Sets the digital output function number parameter group for possible selections Effective when digital output card DO 02 or DO 08 is used 5 Seet or channe Sets the
146. P amp INV CPFO1 COM ERR OP amp INV CPF02 BB Circuit Err CPF03 EEPROM Error CPF04 Internal A D Err Description Option Communication Error After initial communication was established the connection was lost Modbus Communication Error Control data was not received correctly for two seconds This fault is detected when H5 05 1 and H5 04 0 to 2 Control Fault A torque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a ramp to stop while in open loop vector control Operator Communication Fault Transmission between the Drive and the Digital Operator was not established within 5 seconds after supplying power External RAM of CPU was defective Operator Communication Fault After communication started with the Digital Operator communication stopped for 2 seconds or more Baseblock Circuit Fault Baseblock circuit fault at power up EEPROM Fault Check sum was not valid CPU Internal A D Converter Fault Cause Connection was broken and or master controller stopped communicating Connection was broken and or master has stopped communicating Motor parameters were not set properly Digital Operator cable was not securely connected Digital Operator defective and or control board defective Control circuit was damaged Digital Operator cable was not securely connected Digital Operator defective and or control board defective Gate array hardware failure during power up
147. PG B2 Terminal Specifications Terminal Contents Specifications 12Vdc 45 200mA max GND for power supply 8 to 12Vdc L 1 max Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Power supply for pulse generator A phase pulse input terminals Pulse input common 8 to 12Vdc L 1Vdc max B phase pulse input terminals Maximum response frequency 30 kHz Pulse input common Open collector output 24 30mA max A phase monitor output terminals A phase monitor output common 4 Open collector output 24 30mA max B phase monitor output terminals B phase monitor output common Shield connection terminal Wiring the PG B2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 19 and Fig 2 20 for the PG B2 Drive Branch mO Circuit Osu2 vm Protection WTB Power supply 12Vdc Power supply 0Vdc A phase pulse monitor output ee ene ue e B phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG B2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in parameter F1 05 PG Rotation The factory preset is for forward
148. Parameters A 7 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting piss Flux Vector Vector UU Hold Dwell b6 01 Dwell Reference at Start Temporarily holds the frequency reference 0 0 to 0 0H Dwell Ref GStart 400 0 Dwell Time at Start 0 0 to Run command Dwell Frequency at Stop 0 to 56 03 Dwell Ref Stop Output frequency 0 Dwell Time at Stop 0 0 to 0 0 Dwell Time G Stop B 4 10 0 inis gemere Droop Control D Control Level Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of maximum output 00 DR idi frequency E1 04 when the motor is at 100 load torque Setting 100 0 0 0 y of 0 0 disables droop control i 02 Droop Control Delay Time Determines the droop control delay time in response to a load 0 03 to 0 05 Droop Delay Time change 2 00 aa Energy Saving Energy Saving Control Energy Savings function enable disable selection Selection 0 Disabled 0101 0 A A A A Energy Save Sel 1 Enabled Energy Saving Gain 0 0 to b8 02 Energy Save Gain Sets energy savings control gain when in vector control method 10 0 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant Energy Saving F T Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vector 0 00 to control method 10 00 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF b8 05 Power Detection Filter Time Use
149. Purpose When output current exceeds L3 02 level During Accel TE f 0102 1 StallP Accel Sel acceleration stops Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the L3 02 level Intelligent The active acceleration rate is ignored Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3 02 Stall Prevention Level This function is enabled when L3 01 is 1 or 2 During Acceleration Drive rated current is 100 Decrease the set value if stalling or 0 to 200 Setting Factory Description Range Setting StallP Accel Lvl excessive current occurs with factory setting Stall Prevention Limit During Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration as Acceleration percentage of the Drive s rated current when operation is in the StallP CHP Lvl frequency range above E1 06 constant power region When using a braking resistor use setting 0 Setting 3 is used in specific applications 0 Disabled The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate If the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur General Purpose The Drive decelerates at the active 8 deceleration rate but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches Stall Prevention Selection E 2 8 the stall prevention level 380 760V deceleration will stop During Deceleration K 0103 1 Deceleration will continue once
150. RIFY and Auto Tuning A TUNE Returns to the previous display before the DATA ENTER key was ESCAPE d pressed Enables jog operation when the Drive is being operated from the Digital Operator LOCAL Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Drive is being operated EET FWD REV uu from the Digital Operator LOCAL y Increases parameter numbers and set values INCREASE Used to move to the next item or data value Decreases parameter numbers and set values DECREASE i Used to move to the previous item or data value Selects the digit to be changed The selected digit will blink SHIFT RESET Also resets the Drive when a fault has occurred The run command must be removed before the reset command will be accepted DATA ENTER Enter menus and parameters as well as to set values RUN Starts Drive operation when the Drive is being controlled by the Digital Operator LOCAL Stops Drive operation STOP STOP Key This key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the external terminal or communications by setting user parameter 02 02 Digital Operator 3 3 Drive Mode Indicators The definition of the Drive mode indicators are shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Drive Mode Indicators Lit when a forward run command is input R 1 4 D REMOTE Sequence SEQ Indicator The status of the REMOTE Sequence SEQ indicator is shown in Table 3 3 This indicator is always when the Dr
151. ROM fault has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV fault Writing parameters to the Drive during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via Enter commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters processing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive Slave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not IMPORTANT return response messages to the master Communications D 17 Modbus Self Diagnosis The Drive has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of the serial communication interface circuits The self diagnosis function tests the serial communications hardware of the Drive by jumpers the send and receive terminals to receive the same message as the Drive sends Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Drive and set parameter H1 05 Terminal
152. ST ur diane ires 37 COPY Function been ae 39 COPY Function Faults sse 6 17 3 2 3 15 Display Scaling ehem A 37 Fault Detection i oe ette nes 6 2 3 3 Mounting eterne e eee 1 15 Operating Programming Errors OPE 6 13 Parameter 146 3 Preventive Maintenance 2 7 3 Removing 1 14 RUN 5 4 Trouble Shooting eee 6 18 DIP Switch S ctt eec 2 22 Drive Capacity Setting Sel ction ute ei eee RUE B 2 Parameters Affected 3 Drive Date Stamp Information sess 6 29 Drive Enclosure and Revision Code 1 4 Drive Main Circuit Configurations sess 2 10 Drive Main Menus esee a 3 6 Auto Tuning recepere eps 3 6 Modified Constants essere 3 6 Operation 3 6 Programming eere 3 6 Quick Setting unten eveniet 3 6 Drive Mode Indicators 2 3 4 Drive Model Numbers esee 1 4 iecore ee eR eb eR NI 1 4 DONE Tatlig s eie orte tyi mee pe B 2 Drive Start Up Preparation sese 4 2 Drive Start Up Procedures sse 4 5 Auto Tuning 4 10 Flux Vector Start up 4 0 Open Loop Vector Start up 2 2
153. T1 05 number of motor poles T1 06 motor rated speed T1 07 obtained from the motor nameplate information If the Control Method is Flux Vector A1 02 3 be sure to set the encoder pulses per revolution PPR T1 08 After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS O 3 Confirm that the motor is uncoupled from the load and make sure it is safe to rotate the motor Press the RUN key to start Auto Tuning The Drive will energize the motor without rotating it for approximately 1 minute Then the Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while rotating the motor for approximately 1 minute If the Auto Tuning was successful the operator keypad will display Tune Successful 4 Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section Start Up 4 10 BNo Rotate Tuning Use No Rotate Tuning when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control A1 02 2 or 3 and it is impossible to uncouple the load from the motor 1 1 2 3 4 Select the Auto Tuning Menu Then select Tune No Rotate in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter T1 01 1 Set the motor output power T1 02 motor rated voltage T1 03 motor rated current T1 04 motor base frequency T1 05 number of motor poles T1 06 and motor rated speed T1 07 obtained from the motor nameplate inf
154. This parameter sets the number of motor poles During Auto Tuning it is required for the operator to enter the number of motor poles T1 06 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto Tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 06 will automatically be written into E2 04 B 2 11 Motor Rated Power Setting Range 0 00 to 650 00kW Factory Default Varies by This parameter sets the motor rated power is set in kilowatts kW 1HP 0 746kW During Auto Tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor s rated power T1 02 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto Tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 02 will automatically be written into E2 11 PG Option B F1 01 PG Pulses Revolution Setting Range 0 to 60000 Factory Default 1024 If a PG encoder option is used with the Drive the number of PG pulses per motor revolution PPR must be set During Auto Tuning it is required for the operator to enter the PG pulses per revolution T1 08 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto Tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 08 will automatically be written into F1 01 Basic Programming 5 19 Analog Output Gain B H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 100 096 B H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Range 0 0 to 1000 0 Factory Default 50 096 These parameters set the gains for the analog output terminals FM and AM T
155. Time Time accumulates when the Drive is powered 1 Running Time Time accumulates only when the Drive is running Determines parameter default values after a Drive initialization A1 03 is executed This should always be set to 1 for North American installations 1 American spec 2 European spec Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monitor 01 40 Clears the fault memory contained the 02 and U3 monitors 0 Disabled no effect 1 Enabled resets U2 and U3 monitors and returns 02 12 to zero Used to reset the kilowatt hour monitor U1 29 to zero 0 Disabled no change 1 Enabled Resets U1 29 to zero and returns 02 14 to zero Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 38 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting COPY Function This parameter controls the copying of parameters to and from the Digital Operator 0 COPY SELECT no function 1 INV gt OP READ parameters are copied from the Drive to the Digital Operator 2 OP gt WRITE parameters are copied from the 03 01 Copy Function Selection Digital Operator to the Drive Copy Function Sel 3 OP lt gt INV VERIFY Parameter settings in the Drive compared to those in the Digital Operator NOTE When using the copy
156. Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 25 Main Circuit Test Procedure Before attempting any troubleshooting checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure 1 Setthe digital multi meter to its highest Vdc scale Measure between 1 and for the following check Place the positive red meter lead on 1 Place the negative black meter lead on If the measured voltage is lt 10Vdc it is safe to work inside the Drive Measure DC Bus Voltage If not wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged The input diodes rectify or transform the three phase input AC voltage into a DC voltage Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting Place the positive red meter lead on terminal R L1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positiv
157. ZE SCREW d V A AIR m V zi H1 H q T T 1 f fe A L A aL AIR 2 wi d p D J 8 SS T T RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT NOM WEIGHT INPUT CIMR EZU CURRENT HP MOUNTING tas HD ND AMPS HD ND Hi Wi H w H2 w2 D 01 n 2037 145 162 40 50 50 2264 984 2362 1476 049 246 1181 394 3 8 125 2045 180 192 60 60 22 64 9 84 23 62 14 76 0 49 246 12 99 5 12 3 8 139 2055 215 215 75 75 27 56 12 80 28 54 17 72 0 49 2 46 13 78 5 12 3 8 189 208 2075 283 312 100 100 2756 1280 2854 1772 049 246 1378 512 3 8 191 2090 346 360 125 125 32 28 14 57 33 46 19 69 0 59 2 56 1437 512 3 8 238 2110 415 415 150 150 3366
158. accepted only in the operation menu Enabled Run command accepted in all menus except when b1 02 0 Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp to stop b1 03 0 is selected If b2 01 E1 09 DC Injection braking starts at E1 09 Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0 01 seconds Sets the time length of DC injection braking at stop in units of 0 01 seconds When b1 03 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows b2 04 10 Output Frequency E1 04 When b1 03 0 this parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied to the motor at the end of the decel ramp This should be set to a minimum of 0 50 seconds when using HSB This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the motor stops completely Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no load current value E2 03 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 5 Control Method Setting Range ae Factory Setting Loop Vector Flux Vector 0 0 to 10 0 0 5Hz 0 to 100 50 0 00 to 10 00 0 00sec 0 00 to 10 00 0 00sec Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Setting Range Factory Description Setting Open Lo
159. achines or large current electrical equipment 4 Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Drive Therefore if the distance between the ground rod and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Drive could develop 5 When using more than one Drive be careful not to loop the ground wire See Fig 2 4 Fig 2 4 Ground Wiring Examples Electrical Installation 2 11 Dynamic Braking Connections E General Dynamic braking DB enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and rapid stop This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option For further details on dynamic braking operation see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking components Drives F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 have an integral braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mounted Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink Mount Resistor higher rated Drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit CDBR and a Remote Mount Resistor Unit Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of the electrical enclosure Braking Transistor Units mount inside of the electrical enclosure Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount to the back of the Drive attaching directly to the heat sink Table 2 8 He
160. active and operation continues after detection 3 OL4 at Speed Agree Fault Overtorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault 4 OL4 at RUN Fault Overtorque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault 5 UL4 at Speed Agree Alarm Undertorque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection 6 UL4 at RUN Alarm Undertorque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection 7 UL4 at Speed Agree Fault Undertorque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault 8 UL4 at RUN Fault Undertorque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault Torque Detection Selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel Sets the Overtorque Undertorque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or torque for torque detection 2 Current detection for A1 02 0 or 1 Torque detection for A1 02 2 or 3 Torque Detection Level 2 Det 2 Lvl L6 05 Torque Detection Time 2 16 06 Torq Det 2 Time Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Sets the length of time an Overtorque Undertorque condition must exist before torque detection 2 is recognized by the Drive Parameters A 34 Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector 0 to 300 150 A A A A 0 0 to 10 0 0 to 30
161. acts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil measures about 2 2MQ The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states Soft Charge Contactor The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse is used to protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short If the DC bus fuse is open at least one of the output transistors has failed When a transistor fails there is a short between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus The DC bus fuse does not protect the transistors but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a short Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse DC Bus Fuse F1 If the fuse is good the measured value will be 0Q If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 27 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the motor The following checks will read erroneously if the DC bus fuse is open Set a digital multi meter to the Diode Check setting Place the positi
162. age UV Bit 1 Overvoltage OV Bit 2 Heatsink overtemperature OH Bit 3 Drive overheat fault OH1 Bit 4 Overtorque 1 detection OL3 Bit 5 Overtorque 2 detection 4 Bit 6 2 wire sequence input EF Bit 7 External Baseblock BB Bit 8 External fault 3 EF3 Bit 9 External fault 4 EFA Bit A External fault 5 EF5 Bit B External fault 6 EF6 Bit C External fault 7 EF7 Bit D External fault 8 EF8 Bit E Cooling fan FAN BitF Overspeed OS Alarm content 2 Bit 0 Speed deviation DEV Bit 1 PG open PGO Bit 2 Operator disconnected OPR Bit 3 Modbus communication CE Bit 4 Bus error BUS Bit 5 Waiting for transmission CALL Bit 6 Motor overload OL1 Bit 7 Drive overload OL2 Bit 8 SI R G alarm E 15 Bit 9 External fault EFO Bits A to F Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating 1 Stopped 0 Bit 1 Reverse operation Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Drive start up complete Completed 1 Not completed 0 Bit 3 Fault Fault 1 Bit 4 Data setting error Error 1 Bit 5 Multi function digital output 1 terminal MI M2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 6 Multi function digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Multi function digital output 3 terminal M5 6 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 8 to Not used Note Communication err
163. age current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Vibration Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration BThe application is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the carrier frequency This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation but the machinery vibrates with a high pitched whine To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between the mechanical system s natural frequency and the output frequency of the Drive To prevent this from occurring use the jump frequency function in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or have the driven motor and load balanced to reduce vibration B Oscillation and hunting occur with V F control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parameters C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter n1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain C2 01 S curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters B Oscillation and hunting occur with V F w PG control The Speed Control Loop Gain ASR parameter setting C5 01 may be incorrect for the machine Change the gain to a more
164. aking transistor units and remote mount resistor units required for the application Fig 2 8 Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive F7U2022 thru F7U2110 and F7U4022 thru F7U4300 Electrical Installation 2 17 Adjustments 7 Drives Program Parameter L3 04 to 0 or 3 to disable stall prevention during deceleration 8 Heat Sink Mount Resistor Only Program L8 01 to 1 to enable overheat protection for heat sink mount braking resistor Operation Check 9 During dynamic braking verify that the BRAKE lamp inside the Braking Unit is lit This lamp illuminates only when dynamic braking is activating during quick deceleration 10 During dynamic braking ensure that the required deceleration characteristic is obtained If not contact Yaskawa for assistance 11 Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units Remote Mount Resistor Units and the Drive Electrical Installation 2 18 Terminal Connections Connections to Drive terminals are shown in Fig 2 9 DC Link Choke Standard Branch Circuit CIMR F7U2022 to 2110 Protection CIMR F7U4030 to 4300 Remove if adding Supplied U X External DC
165. als Jog frequency reference has priority over multi step speed reference 1 to 4 d1 17 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operator and the multi function inputs forward jog and reverse jog Setting units are affected by 01 03 Reference Limits Determines maximum frequency reference set as a percentage of maximum out put frequency 1 04 If the frequency reference is above this value actual Drive speed will be limited to this value This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources Determines m maximum out below this vali inimum frequency reference set as a percentage of put frequency E1 04 If frequency reference is ue actual Drive speed will be set to this value This parameter applies to all frequency reference sources Determines m inimum frequency reference set as a percentage of maximum output frequency 1 04 If frequency reference from analog input A1 A2 and A3 is below this value actual Drive speed will be set to this value This parameter applies only to analog inputs 1 A2 and Parameters 12 Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Flux Vector 0 lt ERE 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 0 00Hz 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00 to 1 04 Value 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 0 00Hz A 100 0 A 0 0 to 110 0 0 0 to 110 0 0
166. amp Troubleshooting This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive Fault 6 2 6 9 Operator Programming Errors 6 13 Auto Tuning Faults i de 6 15 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults 6 17 Troubleshooting here uat bot xni eek ES 6 18 Main Circuit Test 6 26 Drive Date Stamp 6 29 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 1 Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault the fault information is displayed on the Digital Operator the fault contact closes and the motor coasts to stop However a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected Ifa fault occurs take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause restart reset the fault with any of the following procedures Set 14 Fault Reset to a multi function digital input H1 01 to H1 06 Then close and open the input Press the RESET key of the Digital Operator Shut off the Drive input power and then turn on again Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display BUS Option Com Err CE Memobus Com Err CF Out of Control COM ERR O
167. and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430 150 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current Models 2110 4220 4300 have an overload rating of 12096 of rated output current for 60 seconds 2kHz is the Maximum carrier frequency value and default carrier frequency value for all models Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency N BO Un Specifications C 3 Common Specifications Table 2 480Vac Drive Specifications Continued Model Number CIMR F7U 4037 4045 4055 4075 4090 4110 4132 4220 4300 Par output capacity 460 570 690 850 1100 140 0 160 0 200 0 230 0 280 0 Horsepower 40 50 60 75 100 125150 200 250 300 Rated output current 60 0 75 0 91 0 112 0 150 0 180 0 216 0 260 0 304 0 370 0 Overload capacity 96 of rated output current 150 N A for 60 sec Current limit of rated 150 output current H
168. art up Open Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Start up Flux Vector Flux Vector Start up Start Up 4 5 V F Start up O 9 Apply input power to the Drive O 10 Set the control method of the Drive to V F Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 0 V F Control Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear O 11 Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1 In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter E1 01 Input Voltage This parameter sets the nominal input voltage the Drive will receive Table 4 3 Input Voltage Setting Parameter Parameter Name SSmo ERI Sed M reat No SE Deaky etting Range actory Setting enu Location 155 0 to 255 0 240 0 208 240 208 240 Input Voltage 310 0 to 510 0 480 0 Programming 480Vac 480Vac 12 Select an appropriate V F pattern per the application Go to parameter E1 03 V F Selection and set this parameter per the application A standard V F pattern for a 60Hz motor is 1 60Hz Saturation 13 Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode all
169. assumes no liability for any personal injury property damage losses or claims arising from misapplication of its products WARNING Read and understand this manual before installing operating or servicing this Drive All warnings cautions and instructions must be followed All activity must be performed by qualified personnel The Drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on Do not remove or insert the digital operator while power is on Before servicing disconnect all power to the equipment The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50Vdc To prevent electric shock wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage WARNING The Drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical Amperes 240Vac maximum 200V Class and 480Vac maximum 400V Class Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and or personal injury Refer to Appendix E for further details D
170. at Sink Mount Dynamic Braking Resistor 3 Duty Cycle Heat Sink Mount Resistor Approx Dimensions Inches Drive Model Resistance Braking No F7U Ohms Torque Height Width 208 240 E installation This option should only be installed by a technically qualified individual who is familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved A WARNING Hazardous voltages can cause severe injury or death Lock all power sources feeding the Drive in the OFF position Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or personal injury Preliminary Procedures 1 Disconnect all electrical power to the Drive 2 Remove Drive front cover 3 Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage is disconnected from incoming power terminals and that the DC bus has dissipated Electrical Installation 2 12 Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation Remove the Drive from its mounting for access to the rear of the heat sink 2 Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on the back of the Drive s heat sink with screws M4 x 10mm 0 7mm pitch as shown in figure below Remove the rubber plug and run the braking resistor wires into the hole that leads to the terminal block 3 4 Reinstall the Drive in its mounting position 5 Connect the leads from the Heat Sink Mount Resistor to the Drive terminals B1 and B2 6 Proceed to Adjustments section o
171. ata when using bits 000CH through 000FH Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits Communications 0 10 Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Table D 5 Monitor Data Register No Status signal Bit 0 Run command Bit 1 At zero speed Bit 2 Reverse operation Bit 3 Fault reset signal Bit 4 Speed agree Bit 5 Drive ready Bit 6 Alarm Bit 7 Fault Bits 8 to D Not used Bit E ComRef Bit F ComCtrl Fault details Bit 0 OPE error Bit 1 Err error Bit 2 Program mode Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 toF Not used oPE details error code 01 1 OPE02 2 3 06 6 10 10 OPE11 11 Not used Fault content 1 Bit 0 Fuse blown FU Bit 1 DC bus undervoltage UV1 Bit2 Control power supply undervoltage UV2 Bit 3 Main circuit answerback UV3 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 Ground fault GF Bit 6 Overcurrent OC Bit 7 Overvoltage OV Bit 8 Heatsink overtemperature OH Bit 9 Drive overheat OH1 Bit A Motor overload OL1 Bit B Drive overload OL2 Bit C Overtorque 1 OL3 Bit D Overtorque 2 OL4 Bit E Dynamic Braking Transistor RR Bit F Dynamic Braking Resistor RH Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits 1
172. ault conditionis Eliminate the cause of the H1 06 are programmed for external fault present that is connected toa external fault condition EF6 function that stops the Drive using ramp to multi function digital input Ext Fault S6 stop coast to stop or fast stop EF7 Ext Fault S7 EF8 Ext Fault S8 Check the communication signals SI F G Communication Error Detected has beer Tost A communication error is detected when a run Check the settings of b1 01 and E 15 to the SI F G option card b1 02 SI F G Com Err command or frequency reference is set from connected and b1 01 3 and or the SI F G Option Card b1 01 3 b1 02 3 b1 02 3 Check the setting of F6 01 and communication is lost Check the host side master communication configuration PID Feedback Loss Verify Drive is programmed to This fault occurs when PID Feedback Loss PID feedback source receive the PID feedback source Detection is programmed to fault e g transducer sensor signal b5 12 2 and the PID Feedback PID building automation signal is Feedback Loss Detection Level b5 13 for not installed correctly or is not Check to ensure the PID feedback the PID Feedback Loss Detection Time working and workitig b5 14 properly FBL Feedback Loss Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 4 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Remove the
173. b3 01 65 Kinetic Energy Braking Ride thru N C Closed Normal operation Open KEB ride thru is enabled 66 Kinetic Energy Braking Ride thru N O Closed KEB ride thru is enabled 67 Communications Test Mode Used to test Modbus RS 485 422 interface Multi Function Digital Input 68 High Slip Braking Terminal S8 Function Closed Drive stops using High Slip Braking regardless of run H1 06 Selection command status 0 to 78 Terminal S8 Sel 69 2 Closed Drive runs at frequency reference entered into parameter d1 17 Direction determined by fwd rev input 3 wire control Only 6A Drive Enable Closed Drive will accept run command Open Drive will not run If running Drive will stop per b1 03 71 Speed Torque Control Selection Closed Torque control operation Open Speed control operation 72 Zero Servo Command Closed Zero Servo ON 77 ASR Gain Switch Open ASR proportional gain is set according to C5 01 Closed ASR proportional gain is set according to C5 03 778 Polarity Reversing Command for External Torque Control Closed Reverse polarity Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Note Some digital inputs are control method dependent Parameters A 23 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Flux Vector pum Digital Outputs ET gaoa
174. been set in slave 1 by the PLC IMPORTANT Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle response messages in the same way Command M ssag Response Message Response Message 9 During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H CRC 16 Higher CDH Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower CIH Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity Higher 63H CRC 16 Lower 39H Fig D 9 Function Code 10H Message Example Communications D 9 Modbus Data Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data broadcast data and parameter data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below Reference data can be read and written to Table D 4 Reference Data Register No Reserved Input terminal status Bit 0 Run Forward command Run 1 Stop 0 Bit 1 Run Reverse command Run 1 Stop 0 Bit 2 External fault Fault EFO 1 Bit 3 Fault reset Reset command 1 Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function
175. bus capacitors Apply power to the Drive and conduct the following inspection Table 7 2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied Corrective Action Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the Cooling fan s total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Check Replace Cooling Fan U1 40 for elapsed cooling fan operation time Maintenance 7 2 Preventive Maintenance Table 7 3 Preventive Maintenance Inspection Points Check Points Every 3 6 Months Ambient temperature Humidity Environment Dust Harmful gas General Oil mist Abnormal vibration or noise AC Power Supply Main circuit amp control voltage Loose lugs screws amp wires Hot spots on parts Conductors amp Wire Corrosion Connections Bent conductors Breakage cracking or discoloration Check spacing Transformers amp Reactor AC Power Circuit amp Terminal Blocks Loose damaged Devices Leakage Ruptures broken expansion Capacitance amp insulation resistance Noisy Relays amp Contactors Contact discoloration Cracked Speed reference voltage current contact operation Abnormal fan noise Cooling System Cooling Fans Fins amp Heatsink Loose connectors Free of accumulation LEDs Monitor display values Key functionality Clean DC Bus Capacitors Keypad Display Digital Operator NN x x x x x E X X X X X X If the Drive is used under the following conditions it may be necessary to
176. c sn SC sp At A2 E G 51 52 s3 55 56 57 se AM IG s s M3 M4 M1 M2 Fig 2 3 Control Circuit Terminal Layout Electrical Installation 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 Refer to instruction manual TOE C726 2 for Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit wire sizes Table 2 1 208 240Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Clamping Possible Wire Recommended Terminal Torque Sizes AWG Wire Size AWG Screws Ib in 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 Drive Model CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol 512 3 2 B2 U T lt R LI S L2 T L3 2 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 R LL S L2 T L3 H1 42 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 Dii 2 4 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 5 0 8 1 RILI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 12 to 1 5 lt R LI S L2 T L3 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 12 to 1 5 3 5 to 5 5 lt 1 C C C 3 12 T L3 2 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 12 to 10 12 to 1 5 3 5 to 5 5 5 5 21 99 8to6 2 5 8 to 14 8 21 99 6104 22 600 2 5 1
177. city F7U22P2 2045 for 200V Class continued Pattern Selection Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 16 Table 5 5 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 and higher for 200V Class 1 03 Pattern Selection 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Max Voltage Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Table 5 5 V F Pattern for Drive Capacity F7U2055 and higher for 200V Class continued gels Name Factory Setting E1 03 Pattern Selection B C Max Output Hz Frequency Max Output Voltage V Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for V F or V F w
178. d on the lower right side of the Drive p Manufacture Date 00 7 22 Fig 6 1 Date Stamp Location Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 29 Notes Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 30 Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper maintenance to maintain overall performance Periodic InspecliOttz onion 7 2 Preventive 2 2 400 7 3 Periodic Maintenance of 7 4 Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement 7 5 Removing and Mounting the Terminal Card 7 7 Maintenance 7 1 Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive or motor The ambient temperature should be within the Drive specification of 10 C to 40 C 14 F to 104 F The output current value shown on U1 03 should not be higher than the motor or Drive rated current for an extended period of time The cooling fan in the Drive should be operating normally Before attempting any maintenance checks make sure that the three phase power is disconnected and locked out With power removed from the unit the DC bus capacitors w
179. d Current E203 No Load Current Number of Motor Poles E2 04 Number of Poles Motor Line to Line E2 05 Resistance Term Resistance Motor Leakage Inductance Leak Inductance Motor Iron core Saturation Coefficient 1 Saturation Comp 1 Motor Iron core Saturation Coefficient 2 Saturation Comp 2 Motor Mechanical Loss Mechanical Loss Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Tcomp Iron Loss Motor Rated Output Mtr Rated Power Motor Iron core Saturation Coefficient 3 Saturation Comp 3 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Setting Factory Description Range Setting Motor Setup Set to the motor nameplate full load current in amperes A This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Set to the motor rated slip in hertz Hz This value is automatically set during rotational Auto Tuning Set to the magnetizing current of the motor as a percentage of full load amps E2 01 This value is automatically set during rotational Auto Tuning Set to the number of motor poles This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning Set to the phase to phase motor resistance in ohms Q 0 000 to This value is automatically set by Auto Tuning 65 000 Set to the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning 0 0 to 40 0 Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50 of magnetic ux is value is automatically set durin
180. d at Previous Fault Motor Speed Output Voltage at Previous Fault Output Voltage U2 06 U2 07 DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault DC Bus Voltage Output Power at Previous Fault Output kWatts Torque Reference at Previous Fault Torque Reference U2 08 U2 09 U2 10 Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault 02 11 The format is the same as for U1 10 Input Term Sts Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault The format is the same as for 01 11 Output Term Sts Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault U2 13 The format is the same as for U1 12 Inverter Status U2 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault Elapsed time Note Fault trace is not executed at CPF00 1 UV1 and UV2 F7 Fault History List Table A 4 F7 Fault History List Fault History Most Recent Fault pu Last Fault 214 Most Recent Fault 13 02 Fault Message 2 103503 Fault Message 3 d 4 Most Recent Fault 5205 Fault Message 4 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault U3 05 Elapsed Time 1 Cumulative Operation Time at 214 Most Recent Fault U3 06 Elapsed Time 2 Cumulative Operation Time at 3 d Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 3 Cumulative Operation Time at 4 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 4 5 Most Recent Fault 5222 Fault Message 5 10 6 Most Recent Fault 7 Fault Message 6 th Mog U3 H 7 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 7 3 12 8 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 8 13 9 Most Rece
181. d the procedures to conduct a Drive start up Drive Start Up Preparation 4 2 Drive Start Up Procedures 4 5 Start Up 4 1 Drive Start Up Preparation In order to provide the most reliable Drive available and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or reduction of warranty coverage an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure Please complete the following checklist and maintain it in a secure location as technical service personnel may request information from this checklist Drive Start Up Preparation Date Start Up Person Company Name Start Up Location Sales Order Serial Printed Name Drive Location Phone Signature Owners Representative Printed Name Phone Company Signature Step 1 The Drive is thoroughly tested at the factory The start up person should verify that the Drive is free of shipping and installation damage Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa warranty Claims must be filed with the shipping company as soon as possible for any potential recovery via insurance 2 Review the F7 User Manual TM F7 01 shipped with the Drive 3 Verify that the model number and voltage ratings in the purchase order match the nameplate data for each unit O 4 Location of the Drive is important to achieve prop
182. d to fine tune the energy savings function when in V F control kW Filter Time method Search Operation Voltage b8 06 Limit 0 to 100 096 Search V Limit Zero Servo 5 Sets the position loop gain for Zero Servo command Zero Servo Gain pi 2 we N This function is effective when multi function input zero 0 to 100 Zero Servo Gain S servo command is set 1 erto Completion Sets number of pulses used for the multi function output of 0 to zero servo completion 16383 0 0 to 655 00 Zero Servo Count Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 8 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Time 1 Accel Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 Decel Time 1 Acceleration Time 2 Accel Time 2 Deceleration Time 2 Decel Time 2 Acceleration Time 3 Accel Time 3 Acceleration Time 4 C107 Accel Time 4 08 Deceleration Time 4 Decel Time 4 Deceleration Time 3 Decel Time 3 Fast Stop Time Fast Stop Time Accel Decel Time Setting Unit Acc Dec Units 1 11 Accel Decel Switch Frequency Acc Dec SW Freq S Curve Characteristic at Accel Start SCrv Acc Q Start S Curve Characteristic at Accel End SCrv Acc End S Curve Characteristic at Decel Start SCrv Dec Start S Curve Characteristic at Decel End SCrv Dec End Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Accel Decel e time to accelerate from zero to max
183. default carrier frequency value for all models 5 Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency 120 Normal Duty 400 0Hz Notes Table of Contents Warnings and URN cauia Scan RERUM EIE i iii Table of COMENS ETT E T vii Chapter 1 Physical Installation 11 eene 1 1 F7 Model Number Enclosure Heat Loss and 1 2 erm He c Te 1 3 Component DB oo sodas ei INLINE RA 1 5 Extenor and Mounting do qe 1 7 Checking and Controlling Installation Me erint kot 1 11 Installation Orientation and Clearances 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal 2 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front 1 14 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation 11e eseeeeeeeeee eene 2 1 Terminal BOEK 2 2 Turing Main es eei FR LAS EH A 2 3 Segah odi dc c dE I eee 2 20 Electromagnetic Compatibility EMG de 2 26 stalling and Wiring Option BOarda mds 2 30 Ghapter 3 Digital
184. der information Has the correct model of Drive been delivered Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive to see if there are any dents scratches or other 9 Is the Drive damaged in any way damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or other tool to check for tightness If there are any irregularities in the above items contact the shipping company or the distributor representative who sold the Drive or a Yaskawa office immediately Nameplate Information A nameplate is attached to the right side of each Drive The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive Drive Model Number CIMER FZUZOTS SPEC _ 228 Drive Spec Number INPUT AC3PH 200 240w OUTPUT AC3PH 0 240 0 NDT4 8A 20 CUN MASS 11kg lt lt Weight SIM 14 5991 1245601 23 PRG _ Software Number Input Power Rating p Output Power Rating Serial Number UL File Number Note The Drive Model Number Drive Spec Number Software Number and Serial Number are required to completely identify a Drive HD Heavy Duty ND Normal Duty Fig 1 1 F7 Drive Nameplate Physical Installation 1 3 Drive Model Numbers The model number on the nameplate indicates the design specification voltage and rating of the Drive in alphanumeric codes CIMR F7U202
185. digital input command 3 terminal S3 Bit 7 Multi function digital input command 4 terminal S4 Bit 8 Multi function digital input command 5 terminal S5 Bit9 Multi function digital input command 6 terminal S6 BitA Multi function digital input command 7 terminal S7 Bit B Multi function digital input command 8 terminal S8 Bits C to F Not used 0002H Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003H to 0005H Not used 0006H PID Setpoint 0007H Analog output 1 terminal FM setting 11V 726 to 726 10V 660 0008H Analog output 2 terminal AM setting 11 726 to 726 10V 660 Multi function contact output settings Bit 0 Digital output 1 terminal M1 M2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Digital output 2 terminal M3 M4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Digital output 3 terminal M5 M6 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 3to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set Fault contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Fault contact terminal MA MC ON LOFF 0 Bits 8 to F Not used 000AH to 000 Not used Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Input PID setpoint 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 3 to B Not used C Broadcast data terminal S5 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 D Broadcast data terminal S6 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 E Broadcast data terminal S7 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 F Broadcast data terminal S8 input Enabled 1 Disabled 0 000CH to 000FH Refer to Table D 6 broadcast d
186. e The Drive does not have the enable command when the run command is The Run command was applied applied This alarm stops the motor prior to the enable signal Apply and maintain the enable command before applying the run command EF Both the forward and the reverse run An external forward and Check external sequence logic External Fault commands are input simultaneously for reverse command were input so only one input is received at a 500ms or more This alarm stops the motor simultaneously time Check for an external condition Opt External Flashing Communication Option Card External An external fault condition was Fault present Verify the parameters Verify communication signal Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 9 Digital Operator Display EF3 Ext Fault S3 Flashing EF4 Ext Fault S4 Flashing EF5 Ext Fault S5 Flashing EF6 Ext Fault S6 Flashing EF7 Ext Fault S7 Flashing EF8 Ext Fault S8 Flashing E 15 SI F G Com Err FBL Feedback Loss OH Heatsnk Overtemp Flashing OH2 Over Heat 2 Flashing Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Description External Fault at Terminal S3 S8 Detected when terminals S3 S8 H1 01 to H1 06 are programmed for external fault function that alarms only and continues to run the Drive SI F G Communications Error Detected A communication error is detected when a run command or fre
187. e red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal S L2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal T L3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Input Diodes 01 012 or Q1 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal R L1 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal S L2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal T L3 Expected reading is OL displayed D
188. e changed when the Drive is running td Start Up 4 14 Trial Run O 1 Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on 0 2 Run the Drive at different frequencies and record monitor values With the Drive in Local Mode press the ENTER key at Frequency Reference Monitor U1 01 Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys to set the frequency reference Then press the DATA ENTER key to accept the frequency reference entered Run the Drive at the set frequency reference by pressing the RUN key Use the UP and DOWN keys to view Output Current U1 03 Output Voltage U1 06 and DC Bus Voltage U1 07 while running the Drive throughout its entire speed range Record the following information at each speed Frequency Output Current Output Voltage DC Bus Voltage Hz A Vac Vdc Monitor U1 01 Monitor U1 03 Monitor U1 06 Monitor U1 07 When this table is complete press the STOP key The Drive will stop and the FWD light remains on This step provides benchmark data for the application from the initial start up 0 3 Press the MENU key once to display Operation Press the DATA ENTER key to display Frequency Ref If using a remote speed command press the LOCAL REMOTE key so the REMOTE SEQ and REMOTE REF indicators are on This puts the Drive in REMOTE mode Start Up 4
189. e intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery The Drives are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable UL and cUL standards and CE directives For use in the European Union the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive EN 50178 1997 10 Electronic Equipment for Use in Power Installations EN 60201 1 1997 12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part 1 General Requirements IEC 60204 1 1997 EN 61010 1997 11 Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment 950 1991 A1 1992 2 1993 1995 A4 1996 modified The F7 series Drives comply with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC These Drives conform to the following standard EN 50178 1997 10 Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with fre quency inverters In certain systems it may be necessary to use additional monitoring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations The frequency inverter hardware must not be modified Introduction This section describes the applicability of the manual This manual is applicable to F7 Drives defined by model numbers of CIMR F7UL L L This manual reflects the Software Version 3020 The F7 Drive is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive f
190. e positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is OL displayed Drives have a Control Power Fuse The fuse is located on either the Power PCB 3PCB or the Gate Drive PCB 3PCB The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching mode power supply 1 Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 2 Place one lead of the multi meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the multi meter on the other side of the fuse Control Power Fuse 3 If the fuse is good the measured value will be 00 If the fuse is bad the measured value will be infinite Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 28 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued The Heat Sink amp Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor modules of the Drive Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely 24Vdc Cooling Fans Tf there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad the fan motor can be checked with a digital multi meter Heat Sink amp Internal Set the digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale Measure across the fan motor terminals If 00 are measured conclude that the fan motor is shorted If infinite are measured conclude that the fan motor is burned open
191. e sequence is incorrect To ensure that the brake holds set frequency detection 2 H2 01 5 for the multi function contact output terminals M1 and M2 so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4 01 3 0 to 5 0Hz The contacts will turn ON below 14 01 There is a hysteresis in the frequency detection 2 function 1 a frequency detection width L4 02 2 0Hz Change the setting to approximately 0 5Hz if there is a load droop during stop Do not use the multi function contact output run signal H2 01 0 for the brake ON OFF signal Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 21 If the Motor Overheats The following causes are possible BThe load is too large If the motor load is too large and the torque exceeds the motor s rated torque the motor may overheat Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration deceleration times Also consider increasing the motor size BThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will overheat if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within its acceptable range BAuto Tuning has not been performed for Vector Control Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto Tuning has not been performed Therefore per
192. e shield It is advisable to ground the shield by connecting the cable to the ground plate with metal clips see Fig 2 14 Ground clip Ground plate Fig 2 14 Grounding Surface Layout Electrical Installation 2 26 The grounding surfaces must be highly conductive bare metal Remove any varnish or paint from grounding surfaces Be sure to ground the motor of the machine application Line filter and Drive must be mounted on the same metal plate Mount the two components as close to each other as possible with cables kept as short as possible not exceeding 15 75 see Fig 2 15 See Table 2 16 for recommended filters L2 B Grounding Remove varnish or paint Metal plate 4 F7 Drive EMC Filter z Cable Max Length 15 75 Motor Cable Max Length 82 feet Grounding Remove varnish or paint o Fig 2 15 EMC Filter Layout Electrical Installation 2 27 Recommended EMC Filters Table 2 16 Recommended EMC Filters EMC Filter Drive Model Dimensions CIMR F7U Model Number Current inches Rating mm 200Vac Class PEE 2 43 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 X X 1 20P7 FS5972 10 07 B 10A 1 1 141 x 330 x 46 21 5 2 87 5 500 x 13 x 1 875 22 2 5972 18 07 18 1 3 141 x 330 x 46 23P7 3 09
193. e that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive Maintenance 7 5 Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 These Drives have an internal cooling fan assembly and a heatsink cooling fan assembly The heatsink cooling fan assembly is attached to the top of the heatsink inside the Drive The cooling fan s can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel Removing the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly 1 2 3 Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly Remove the terminal cover Drive cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Drive Remove the Control PCB bracket if necessary to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board 13 PCB positioned near the top of the Drive Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate drive board 3PCB positioned at the back of the Drive Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive Remove the cooling fan s from the fan assembly Mounting the Heatsink Cooling Fan Assembly After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive Air flow direction __ Fan cover Fig 7 2
194. e width Electrical Installation 2 21 DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 S1 15 Fig 2 10 DIP Switch S1 and Jumper CN15 Location B Dip Switch 51 DIP Switch S1 is described in this section The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in Table 2 13 Si ZZ ON OFF qas 4 J ON position 2 DIP Switch S1 located lt terminal board Fig 2 11 DIP Switch S1 Function Table 2 13 DIP Switch S1 Function Setting OFF No terminating resistance RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resistance ON Terminating resistance of 1100 Factory Default OFF OFF 0 to 10Vdc or 10 to 10Vdc internal resistance 20K Input method for analog input A2 ON 4 20mA internal resistance 2500 Factory Default ON Jumper CN15 Jumper CNI5 is described in this section The jumper position of CH1 and CH2 determines the signal level of the multi function analog output FM and AM respectively The functions and positions of CN15 are shown in Table 2 14 Table 2 14 Jumper CN15 Configuration Options Jumper CN15 Configuration Analog Output Monitor Configuration Voltage Output 0 10Vdc for terminals and AM AC CH2 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC 1 and CH2 Voltage Output 0 10Vdc for terminals CH1 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals AM AC CH2 Current Output 4 20mA for terminals FM AC 1 V
195. eavy Duty Carrier frequency 2kHz Maximum output 300 0Hz frequency Rated output capacity Horsepower 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Rated output current 67 2 77 0 96 0 125 0 156 0 180 0 240 0 260 0 304 0 414 0 515 0 675 0 3 51 0 59 0 73 0 95 0 120 0 140 0 180 0 200 0 230 0 315 0 390 0 510 0 Output ratings Overload capacity 96 of rated output current 107 117 114 108 115 120 108 120 120 107 118 120 for 60 sec Current limit of rated 120 output current Carrier frequency kHz 8 8 8 5 5 8 5 5 5 2 2 2 Maximum output frequency Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage Normal Duty 400 0Hz Rated voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac 50 60Hz Rated frequency Rated input current i 66 83 100 120 165 198 238 286 334 407 537 743 8 Heavy Duty A 8 E Rated input current Rd M 74 85 106 134 172 198 264 286 334 456 567 743 Normal a 2 5 Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 1596 amp Allowable frequency 59 fluctuation ja DC Reactor Built in power supply harmonics 12 Pulse Possible E Rectification MESE M The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated in
196. eblock Output Frequency Time L2 03 x E 100 Maximum 0 Frequency Output Frequency Timer Value Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Fig 5 6 Coast to Stop with Timer Basic Programming 5 7 Accel Decel Time 1 01 Acceleration Time 1 B 1 02 Deceleration Time 1 Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Factory Default 10 0sec C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum output frequency E1 04 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 sets the time to decelerate from maximum output frequency to zero C1 01 and 1 02 are the factory default active accel decel settings Alternate accel decel settings C1 03 through C1 08 can be activated by multi function digital inputs 1 00 7 and 1A or specified by the switch over frequency 1 11 See Fig 5 7 below C1 11 Output Frequency gt 4 Time C1 07 Rate C1 01 Rate C1 02 Rate C1 08 Rate Fig 5 7 Acceleration deceleration Time Switch Over Frequency Basic Programming 5 8 Carrier Frequency 6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection Em Parameter C6 02 sets the switching frequency of the Drive s output transistors It can be changed in order to reduce audible carrier noise and also reduce leakage current Cases that may require adjustment to the C6 02 include e Ifthe wiring length between the Drive and the motor is long decrease the carrier frequency Wiring Length 164 ft or less 328 ft or less Over
197. ector Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then press DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off The FWD light turns on A WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off Frequency Ref U1 01 now displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with a factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check Proceed to the Auto Tuning section Start Up 4 8 Flux Vector Start up L1 1 8 9 O 10 O 12 13 14 15 1 16 O 17 See Drive Start Up Procedures on Page 4 5 Apply input power to the Drive Set the control method of the Drive to Flux Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 0
198. eeds the setting of parameter L8 02 During Torque Limit when in speed control Closed When in torque limit During Speed Limit Closed When in speed limit During Speed Limit when in torque control Closed When motor frequency is at the speed limit value when running in torque control Zero Servo Complete Closed 2 When Zero Servo is complete within the b9 02 zero servo completion width During Run 2 Closed When Drive is operating except during baseblock or DC braking Drive Enable Closed When the Drive enable input is active Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Note Some digital outputs are control method dependent Parameters 25 Control Method Setting Factory Range Setting Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Terminal A1 Signal Level H3 01 Selection Term A1LvI Sel H3 02 Terminal A1 Gain Setting Terminal A1 Gain H3 03 Terminal A1 Bias Setting Terminal A1 Bias Terminal A3 Signal Level H3 04 Selection Term A3 Signal Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Setting Description Range Analog Inputs Sets the signal level of terminal A1 0 0 to 10Vdc 0101 1 10 to 10Vde Sets the output level when 10V is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 Sets the output level when OV is input as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 100 0 to 100
199. effective level If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way set the Hunting Prevention Selection 1 01 0 disabled Then try re adjusting the gain Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 23 B Oscillation and hunting occur with Open Loop Vector control The torque compensation parameter settings may be incorrect for the machine Adjust parameters C4 01 Torque Compensation Gain C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter C2 01 S curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain parameters and raise the primary delay time parameters Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto Tuning has not been performed Therefore perform Auto Tuning Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V F Control 0 or 1 B Oscillation and hunting occur with Flux Vector control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the speed control loop ASR gain C5 01 If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated increase the ASR primary time delay constant C5 06 and then readjust the ASR gain C5 01 Vector Control may not perform optimally if Auto Tuning has not been performed Therefore perform Auto Tuning Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V F Control 0 or 1 BOscillation and hunting occur with PID control If there is oscillation or hunting during PID contro
200. ency reference are equal to the value in L4 03 the hysteresis of L4 04 Frequency Detection 3 Closed When the Drive output frequency is less than or equal to the value in L4 03 with the hysteresis determined by L4 04 Frequency Detection 4 Closed When the Drive output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4 03 with the hysteresis determined by L4 04 Torque Detection 1 N C Open When the output current torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 Torque Detection 2 N O Closed When the output current torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6 05 for more time than is set in parameter L6 06 Torque Detection 2 N C Open when the output current torque exceeds the value set in parameter L6 05 for more time than is set in parameter L6 06 Reverse Direction Closed When the Drive is running in the reverse direction Baseblock 2 N C Open When Drive is not outputting voltage Motor 2 Selection Closed 2 When motor 2 is selected by multi function input motor 2 selection Regenerating Closed When in regenerating mode Restart Enabled Closed When the Drive is performing an automatic restart attempt Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5 01 Overload OL1 Closed When OL function is at 90 of its trip point or greater OH Prealarm Closed When the Drive s heatsink temperature exc
201. ency and default carrier frequency Maximum output voltage 480Vac Table 1 3 480Vac Drive Specifications Model Number CIMR F7U 41P5 42P2 43P7 44P0 45P5 Rated output capacity KVA Horsepower 0 5 0 75 Rated output current A 1 8 1 4 Overload capacity 96 of rated output current for 60 sec Heavy Duty Current limit of rated output current Carrier frequency Maximum output frequency Rated output capacity 1 4 Horsepower 0 5 0 75 Rated output current A 1 8 aL 9b 5 amp o Overload capacity 96 of rated output 120 current for 60 sec Normal Duty Current limit of rated output current Carrier frequency kHz 15 Maximum output 400 0Hz frequency Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480Vac Proportional to input voltage Model Number CIMR F7U 4220 4300 Rated output capacity Horsepower 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 Rated output current A 60 0 75 0 91 0 112 0 150 0 180 0 216 0 260 0 304 0 370 0 Overload capacity 96 of rated output 150 current for 60 sec 46 0 57 0 69 0 85 0 110 0 140 0 160 0 200 0 230 0 280 0 N A Heavy Duty Current limit 96 of rated 150 output current Carrier frequenc
202. ension is 4 75in 120mm minimum For Drive model F7U4300 this clearance dimension is 11 8in 300mm minimum other models require 1 97in 50 minimum For Drive model F7U4300 this clearance dimension is 11 8in 300mm minimum other models require 4 75in 120mm minimum Fig 1 8 Drive Installation Orientation and Clearance 1 The same clearance is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis IPOO and NEMA Type 1 Drives IMPORTANT 2 Always remove the top and bottom protection covers before installing a CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller Drive in a panel 3 Always provide enough clearance for lifting eye bolts and the main circuit wiring when installing a CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger Drive in a panel Physical Installation 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to connect cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Removing the Terminal Cover Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 9 Removing the Terminal Cover Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull down the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal cover in
203. er Digital Operator Display Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant Motor 2 Rated Slip 58 03 Energy Saving E4 02 Motor Rated Slip Energy Saving Coefficient Value Motor 2 No Load Current b8 04 Energy Save COEF E4 03 No Load Current Carrier Frequency Duty Motor 2 Line to Line Resistance C6 01 Heavy Normal Duty E4 05 Term Resistance Motor Rated Current E4 06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance E2 01 Motor Rated FLA 7 Leakage Inductance Motor Rated Slip Motor 2 Rated Output E2 02 Motor Rated Slip E4 07 Motor 2 Rated KW Motor No load Current Momentary Power Loss Ride thru Time 2 03 No load Current 2 02 PwrL Ridethru t Motor Line to Line Resistance Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time E2 05 Term Resistance L2 03 PwrL Baseblock t Motor Leakage Inductance Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time E2 06 Leakage Inductance L2 04 PwrL V F Rampt Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Overheat Pre Alarm Level E2 10 Tcomp Iron Loss L8 02 OH Pre Alarm Lvl Motor Rated Output Drive kVA Selection E21 Motor Rated KW 02 04 Inverter Model Motor 2 Rated Current 4 01 F Motor Rated FLA Capacity Related Parameters B 3 Table B 3 Parameter Defaults 208 240V 208 240V Model Number CIMR F7U 20 4 20 7 21 5 220 23 7 25P5 27 5 2011 2015 b8 03 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 5
204. er and connect the communication cable between the PLC or other master device and the Drive 2 Turn ON the input power to the Drive 3 Set the required communication parameters H5 01 to H5 07 using the Digital Operator 4 Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and check that the Digital Operator display has completely extinguished 5 Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again 6 Perform communication with the master device Communications D 3 Related Parameters Parameter No b1 01 b1 02 H5 01 H5 02 H5 03 H5 04 H5 05 H5 06 H5 07 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Run Command Selection Run Source Drive Node Address Serial Comm Adr Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Communication Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Stopping Method After Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Communication Fault Detection Selection Serial Flt Dtct Drive Transmit Wait Time Transmit WaitTIM RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel Table D 2 Serial Communication Related Parameters Setting Factory Range Setting 0 to 20 Hex Oto 10 Description Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or d1 01 to d1 17 1 Terminals Analog input terminal A1 or terminal A2 based on parameter H3 13 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R 5 and S 3 Option PCB Option
205. er performance and normal operating life The unit should be installed in an area where it is protected from Direct sunlight rain or moisture gases or liquids Vibration airborne dust or metallic particles 5 Ensure the Drive is on a vertical surface with adequate space for air circulation 4 75 above and below 1 2 on each side Refer to Fig 1 8 6 Verify that the proper branch circuit protection is installed in front of the Drive Refer to Appendix E Peripheral Devices for proper input fuse or circuit breaker sizing Start Up 4 2 Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise Never allow wire leads to touch metal surfaces Short circuit may result Never connect AC main power to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Never connect power factor correction capacitors or noise filters to the Drive output 12 Use 600Vac vinyl sheathed wire or equivalent Wire size should be determined considering voltage drop of leads 17 18 Line voltage drop V 3 x wire resistance Q km x wire length m x current A x 10 It is recommended that the motor lead length not exceed 164 feet 50 meters and motor wiring be run in a separate conduit from the power wiring If lead length must exceed this distance reduce the carrier frequency See Table 2 6 and consult Yaskawa toll free at 1 800 YASKAWA 927 5292 for o
206. es as shown below Table D 3 Modbus Function Codes Command Message Response Message Function Min Max Min Max Bytes Bytes Bytes Bytes Function Code Hexadecimal 03H Reading Holding Register Contents 06H Write In Single Holding Register 08H Loopback Test 10H Write In Several Holding Registers 11 Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message error response message is always 5 bytes Communications D 5 Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Error Check Errors are detected during communication using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communication is typically zero but when using the Modbus system set the factory setting to one e g set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages CRC 16 At the end of the message the data for CRC error checking is sent in order to detect errors in signal transmission In Modbus RTU the error check is conducted in the form of a CRC 16 Cyclical Redundancy Check The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message It is applied regardless of a
207. eter can be changed when the Drive is running Start Up 4 12 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display 1 01 1 03 Input Voltage Setting Input Voltage Pattern Selection V F Selection Maximum Output Frequency Max Frequency Maximum Output Voltage 1 04 Max Voltage Base Frequency Base Frequency Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency Base Voltage Base Voltage Motor Rated Current pem Motor Rated FLA E2 04 E Motor Rated Output Motor Rated Power PG Parameter 7 PG Pulse Rev Number of Motor Poles Number of Poles Description Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line sets maximum base voltage used by preset V F patterns E1 03 0 to E adjusts the levels of Drive protective features i e Overvoltage braking resistor turn on stall prevention etc Set to the type of motor being used and the type of application The Drive operates utilizing a set V F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V F patterns to select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base levels base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through E1 13 E1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage
208. ethod dependent Parameter No Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Setting Description Range Factory Setting Serial Communications Setup H5 01 H5 06 H5 07 Drive Node Address Serial Comm Adr Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Communication Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Stopping Method After Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Communication Fault Detection Selection Serial Flt Dtct Drive Transmit Wait Time Transmit WaitTIM RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel Selects Drive station node number address for Modbus terminals R S S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect 0 to 20 Hex Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R 5 and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R S and S The Drive s power must be cycled for the setting to take effect 0 No Parity 1 Even Parity 2 Odd Parity Selects the stopping method when a communication timeout fault CE is detected 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Enables or disables the communications timeout fault CE 0 Disabled A communication loss will not cause a communication fault 1 Enabled If communication is lost for more tha
209. form Auto Tuning Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V F Control 0 or 1 If Peripheral Devices Like PLCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running Drive The following solutions are possible 1 Change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to reduce the amount of transistor switching noise Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive s input power terminals Install an Output Noise Filter at the Drive s motor terminals Use conduit Electrical noise can be shielded by metal so run the Drive s power leads in a conduit or shielded cable Ground the Drive and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring RS D Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 22 If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Drive s output is a series of high frequency pulses so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a higher leakage current detection level 1 a sensitivity current of 200mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 15 or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures i e one designed for use with a Drive It will also help to change the Drive s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leak
210. frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency b2 01 or the minimum output frequency E1 09 whichever is greater deceleration will stop and DC current will be injected into the motor at the current level set in b2 02 for the time set in b2 04 ON Run Command OFF DC Injection Start Frequency b2 01 100 DC Injection Brake Time when Stopping b2 04 Output Frequency Deceleration Time 1 02 DC Injection Braking 0 Fig 5 3 Deceleration to Stop The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula Output frequency at time of stop command Time to stop x Active deceleration time Maximum frequency E1 04 IMPORTANT If S Curve characteristics are set in the Drive programming they will add to the total time to stop 1 Coast to stop When the run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output transistors The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the system and the motor will stop ON Run Command OFF 100 Output Frequency 0 Fig 5 4 Coast to Stop IMPORTANT After a stop is initiated subsequent run commands will be ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 has expired Basic Programming 5 6 2 DC Injection to Stop When the run command is removed the Drive will Baseblock turn off all output transistors for the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 Once the Minimum Basebl
211. g rotational Auto Tuning 0 00 to fl T 0 50 Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 7596 of magnetic ux 0 50 to This value is automatically set during rotational Auto Tuning 0 75 Set to the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power kW capacity Adjust in the following circumstances When torque loss is large due to motor bearing friction When the torque loss in the load is large Set to the motor iron loss in watts W Set to the motor rated power in kilowatts kW 0 00 to This value is automatically set during Auto Tuning 650 00 1 0 746kW Set to the motor iron saturation coefficient at 13096 of magnetic flux This value is automatically set during rotational Auto Tuning Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 16 Control Method Loop Vector 7 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Setting Range Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display SaaS V F Pattern 2 Motor 2 Control Method VIE control 1 V F control with PG E3 01 Selection 2 1 trol Control Method Open loop vector contro 3 Flux vector control Description Motor 2 Maximum Output 02 Frequency 5 y Max Frequency uty Rating Output voltage V 0 0 to 3 255 0 Motor 2 Maximum Output 240V E3 03 Voltage 0 0 to Max Voltage 510 0 480V E3 04 Motor 2 Base Frequency Base Frequency A
212. he 220V 440V 575V position To access jumper plugs remove the plastic cover A WARNING Besure to set the nominal line voltage selection jumper to match the level of the AC supply being applied to the Drive Failure to do so may result in improper operation 3 If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed the unit closest to the Drive should have the Slave Master jumper plug set to the Master position factory setting all others must have this jumper plug set to the Slave position 4 If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed connect them to the Drive and external control circuitry according to the chart and figure below 5 Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these power leads must be grouped separately from all other leads Table 2 10 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit and Braking Transistor Unit Braking Transistor Unit Main 12 10 3 5 5 5 Models CDBR 2015B 2022B 4030B 4045B Tu 18 14 075 2 or equivalent 4 600V vinyl sheathed wire P Mai P Po B 12 10 3 5 5 5 f Braking Transistor Unit 2 600V vinyl sheathed wire 20 MA 2 3 5 6 AK Model CDBR 2045 4090 Control l 18 14 0 75 2 or equivalent P Po N B 5122 6 Main 8 6 8 14 1 Braking Transistor Unit 12 10 3 5 5 5 600V vinyl sheathed wire Model CDBR 2110 or equivalent 2 Control 18 14 0
213. he analog outputs are used for external monitoring of Drive conditions such as output frequency output current PID feedback and others To obtain the output level multiply the monitor output level by the gain set in 4 02 or 4 05 For example if 4 02 150 then the FM analog output will output 10Vdc when the assigned output function reaches the 67 level The analog output has a maximum of 10Vdc 10 x 150 10V of e lt 0 67 100 Output Function Level 96 Fig 5 10 Analog Output Gain Setting Example Basic Programming 5 20 Motor Overload Fault L1 01 Motor Overload Fault Selection Setting Description 0 Disabled 1 Standard Fan Cooled Motor 10 1 motor factory default Standard Blower Cooled Motor 210 1 motor Vector Motor lt 1000 1 motor The Drive has an electronic overload protection function OL1 for protecting the motor from overheating The Drive bases the protection on time output current and output frequency The electronic thermal overload function is UL recognized so an external thermal overload relay is not required for single motor operation This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied Setting L1 01 1 selects a motor with limited cooling capability below rated base speed when running at 100 load The function derates the motor any time it is running below base speed Setting L1 01 2 se
214. he data input for Auto Tuning is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current There is an error between the no load current setting and the input motor rated current when Auto Tuning only line to line resistance is performed for vector control An alarm is detected during Auto Tuning The STOP key is pressed during Auto Tuning and the Auto Tuning is interrupted Auto Tuning is not completed within the specified time The Auto Tuning result is outside the parameter setting range The motor did not accelerate in the specified time C1 01 10 seconds The torque reference exceeded 10096 during acceleration Detected when 1 02 2 or 3 vector control Current exceeded the motor rated current Any of U TI V T2 and W T3 has open phase Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 15 Corrective Action Check Auto Tuning input data T1 parameters Check Drive and motor capacity for compatibility Check motor rated current and no load current E2 03 and T1 04 Check Auto Tuning input data T1 parameters Check output motor wiring Check the load Check Auto Tuning input data T1 parameters Check motor wiring f the motor and the machine are connected disconnect the motor from the machine For Er 08 if the setting of T1 03 is higher than the Drive s input voltage change the input voltage setting Increase C
215. he latest version of Drive software is also shown The Drive s capacity is categorized based on two types of load characteristics Heavy Duty and Normal Duty See Table i 1 below for the differences between Heavy Duty and Normal Duty Table i 1 Drive Duty Selection Parameter Rated Output Overload Carrier Maximum Output C6 01 Current Capacity Frequency Frequency 0 Heavy Duty Standard rating Lo default varies by model 2kHz JUS Extended rating Approx 110 for 1 min High 2 Normal Duty varies by model varies by model 120 varies by model See Drive Specifications This manual references the various Drive capacities according to its model number CIMR F7U JL See Drive Output Specifications Table 1 2 and Table 1 3 on the following pages for rated capacities and Drive specifications Drive Output Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed in the following tables 208 240Vac Table i 2 208 240Vac Drive Specifications Model Number CIMR F7U 20P4 20 7 21P5 22 2 23 7 25P5 27 5 2011 2015 2018 2022 2030 2037 2045 2055 2075 2090 2110 Rated output capacity KVA Horsepower 0 5 0 75 Rated output 1 2 32 current Overload capacity of rated output current for 60 sec Current limit of rated output current Heavy Duty Carrier frequency 4
216. iagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 26 Table 6 6 Main Circuit Test Procedure continued The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive Soft Charge Resistor Check R1 R2 6PCB 1 Conduct visual inspection Check for physical damage 2 Seta digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale 3 Ifthe resistor is damaged the measured value will be infinite The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus voltage has reached its normal operating level Conduct a visual inspection Check for physical damage Set a digital multi meter to the R x 1 scale On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that each contact resistance measures infinite Q On Drives without a board mounted contactor press the plunger in and verify that each contact measures 00 On Drives without a board mounted contactor release the plunger and verify that the resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor On Drives with a board mounted contactor verify that the contactor coil measures about 3000 The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the contacts change states On Drives without a board mounted contactor verify that the 230Vac contactor coil measures about 1750 The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the cont
217. ic DIRAS transistor braking resistor y braking transistor or resistor Monitor DC bus voltage Zero Servo Fault The torque limit was too small Increase the torque limit Fault 10 000 revolutions during zero servo THe load torque was toolarge Reduce the toad Zero Servo Fault 10 000 revolutions during zero servo The load torque was too large Reduce the load torque operation Control circuit fault Check for signal noise Ensure the values in L6 02 and UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Undert Det 1 Drive output current L6 02 for more than Motor was underloaded PIE ee the time set in L6 03 when L6 01 7 or 8 to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Drive output current L6 05 for more than Motor was underloaded Undertorq Det 2 the time set in L6 06 when L6 04 7 or 8 Check application machine status Lowi Check the input circuit and 19 pui a M increase the input power to within DC Bus Undervoltage specifications 208 240Vac Default trip point is 190Vdc UV1 480Vac Default tri int is SM Extend the time in C1 01 or other p point is lt 380Vdc DC Bus Undervolt Trip point is adjustable in L2 05 time Is set too active accel settings used such as Detected when the DC bus voltage is C1 03 C1 05 or C1 07 time lt L2 05 Voltage fluctuation of the input de
218. igured for the proper voltage 22 Ensure Motor Rated Current is less than or equal to Drive Output Amps If multiple motors are being used make sure that the Motor Rated Current sum is less than or equal to Drive Output Amp rating Please note that if multiple motors are being operated from one Drive each motor must have its own overload and short circuit protection Start Up 4 3 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3l 32 33 Wire all necessary input power leads to the Drive DO NOT CONNECT MOTOR TO DRIVE YET Wire all necessary ground wires to the Drive Wire all necessary control wires to the Drive Ensure that the power leads are connected to the R L1 S L2 and T L3 terminals in the Drive Tighten all of the three phase power and ground connections Please check that all control and signal terminations are tight For Drive models F7U4075 thru F7U4300 set the power supply voltage jumper Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage The jumper is factory set to 460Vac when shipped Be sure the power is off and the CHARGE indicator is gone out before changing the jumper setting 200 208 240 400 415V 460 T Power tab NBI M 00 200V class power supply EM 400V class power supply Power supply input terminals _ CHARGE
219. ill stay charged for several minutes The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus voltage is below 10Vdc To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltmeter set to the highest scale Be sure not to touch terminals immediately after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock Please refer to Warnings starting on page i Table 7 1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied Corrective Action External terminals mount Are all screws and bolts tight Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly ing bolts connectors etc Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors TS P Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Control PCB Terminal PCB Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on Clean off any dirt anid dust with gun using dry Power PCB the PCBs air at a pressure between 55 85 psi Replace the boards if they Gate Drive PCBs cannot be made clean Input Diodes herang Heu ore OR Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using clean and dry IPMs y air at a pressure between 55 85 psi the modules or components Output Transistors Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Are there any irregularities such as discoloration or odor Replace the capacitors or Drive DC
220. imum frequency Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi function input Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi function input Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi function input Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi function input Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when selected via a multi function input Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when selected via a multi function input e time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for ulti function input Fast Stop function e setting resolution of C1 01 to C1 09 01 sec 0 00 to 600 00 sec sec 0 0 to 6000 0 sec Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel decel times Fout lt 1 11 Accel Decel Time 4 Fout gt C1 11 Accel Decel Time 1 Multi function inputs Multi Acc Dec 1 and Multi Acc Dec 2 have priority over 1 11 S Curve Accel Decel S curve is used to further soften the starting and stopping ramp The longer the S curve time the softer the starting and stopping ramp Run comma UN OFF Output fr quency C202 _ C2 03 2 0 Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector V F 0 lt
221. in the following manner or else an 10 fault 00 will occur 255 5 Maximum Output Voltage 1 04 gt 1 11 gt E1 06 gt E1 07 gt E1 09 240 EL 05 Max Voltage 0 0t 8 Note Setting parameter E1 01 0 is also acceptable 510 480V 3 Base Frequency Output voltage V 1 06 Base Frequency E1 07 Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A Mid Output Voltage A E1 08 Mid Voltage A E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency E1 09 1 07 1 06 1 11 1 04 E1 10 Minimum Output Voltage Min Voltage Frequency Hz El ll Mid Output Frequency B Mid Frequency B Set only when the V F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant US 87 power HP area above base speed Adjustment is not normally z 1d Output Voltage required 1 12 Mid Voltage 0 0Vac A A A A 0 0 to Set only when the V F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant 255 0 EI 13 Base Voltage power HP area above base speed Adjustment is not normally 240V 0 0V2 A A Base Voltage required If E1 13 0 0 then value in E1 05 is used for E1 13 0 0 to Auto Tuning sets this value 510 0 480V Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 40 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 40 0 to 400 0 Parameters A 15 Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Motor Rated Current Motor Rated FLA Motor Rated Slip Motor Rated Slip Motor No Loa
222. inal input voltage the Drive will receive Table 4 4 Input Voltage Setting Parameter Parameter Name oan EVA Digital Operator Display S M E Mace 155 0 to 255 0 240 0 uw 208 240Vac 208 240Vac Quick Seung or Input Voltage 310 0 to 510 0 480 0 Programming 480Vac 480Vac 12 Select an appropriate V F pattern per the application Press the UP key once to display parameter E1 03 V F Selection To set this parameter press the DATA ENTER key once Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter per the application A standard V F pattern for a 60Hz motor is 1 60Hz Saturation 13 Set the PG Pulses Rev of the PG Encoder to the correct value In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter F1 01 Pulses Rev Use the UP DOWN and RESET keys and the DATA ENTER key to set the encoder PPR 14 Display motor speed monitor U1 05 Motor Speed in the Operation menu 15 Rotate the motor shaft by hand in the forward direction for the machine A low positive speed should be displayed PG B2 PG X2 PG W2 As the shaft is turned in reverse a low negative speed should be displayed If the speed doesn t change when the motor shaft is rotated check the encoder wiring and connections If the polarity is wrong swap and A wires terminals 4 and 5 on the PG X2 16 Set the Drive to Local control Press the MENU key once to display the Operation menu Then pres
223. indc dole power is too large p ge Cycle power to the Drive External load was _ Remove all control wiring and test UV2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage pulling down the Drive s Drive or disconnect control Undervoltage of the control circuit when power supplies or there was PS Undervolt running an internal short in the power terminal strip gate Dove boards Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Cycle power to the Drive ircui Contacts on the soft charge Check the condition of the soft UV3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault contactor were dirty and the MC Answerback D pre charge contactor opened while the charge contactor does not g rive was running P function mechanically Repair or replace the Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 8 Alarm Detection Alarms are Drive protection functions that do not operate the fault contact The Drive will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed During an alarm condition the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 if programmed When an alarm occurs take appropriate corrective action according to the table below Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Digital Description Cause Corrective Action Operator Display BUS Option Communication Error Connection is broken master Option Com Err After initia
224. indicator Jumper factory set position Figure 4 1 Power Supply Voltage Jumper Inspect the control circuit connections including the shield and determine if a motor safety circuit is connected If normally closed these contacts may be wired in series with the RUN command contacts which are between terminals S1 and SN of the Drive No special programming is required Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 10 Alternately these contacts could be wired between terminals S3 and SN as External Fault Inputs and may be either normally closed or normally open contacts Inspect any option cards for proper installation and wiring Refer to Chapter 2 Option Cards If Braking Resistors and or Braking Transistor Units are used check the terminal connections Refer to Chapter 2 Braking Resistors If a contactor is used between the Drive and motor wire the contactor so that the Drive controls the pull in and drop out of the contactor Use the multi function output and necessary auxiliary circuitry to energize the contactor coil Consult the factory for wiring details Record any other connections to the Drive using the blank terminal connection drawing in Chapter 2 Electrical Installation Fig 2 13 to determine if special programming is required for the following refer to Appendix A Multi function Inputs Outputs Digital Inputs and Analog Outputs Serial Communications THIS COMPLETES THE DRIVE ST
225. ing the PG D2 Wiring examples are provided in Fig 2 21 for the PG D2 Branch 4 Circuit Protection Power supply 12 Power supply 200 Power supply 5Vdc Pulse input A phase e Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG D2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 21 PG D2 Wiring Electrical Installation 2 36 PG X2 The terminal specifications for the PG X2 are given in Table 2 21 Table 2 21 PG X2 Terminal Specifications Terminal No Contents Specifications 12Vdc 5 200mA max Power supply for pulse generator GND for power supply 5Vdc 5 200mA max A phase input terminals Line driver input RS 422 level Besa V Maximum response frequency 300kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Z phase input terminals Common terminal GND for power supply A phase output terminals B phase output terminals Line driver output RS 422 level Z phase output terminals NY A Control circuit common Isolated control circuit GND TA3 B Shield connection terminal 5Vdc and 12Vdc cannot be used at the same time
226. inspect more often e High ambient temperatures humidity or altitudes above 3 300 feet Frequent starting and stopping e Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load e Excessive vibration and or shock loading e Poor environment including dust metal dust salt sulfuric acid chlorine e Poor storage conditions Maintenance 7 3 Periodic Maintenance of Parts In order to keep the Drive operating normally over a long period of time and to prevent down time due to an unexpected failure it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life The data indicated in the following table is to be used as a general guideline only Periodic inspection standards vary depending on the Drive s installation environment conditions and usage The Drive s suggested maintenance periods are noted below Table 7 4 Part Replacement Guidelines Pat Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method Cooling fan s 2 to 3 years 20 000 hours Replace with new part Replace with new part DE bus capacitors 2 Determine need by inspection Soft charge contactor Determine need by inspection DC bus fuse Control power fuse 10 years Replace with new part Replace with new board BCE 3years Determine need by inspection Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 86 F
227. ion which allows the OV Suppression Function Drive to change the output frequency as the load changes to Selection prevent OV fault 0101 OV Inhibit Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 350 to 390 OV Suppression Function Sets the DC bus voltage level at which the OV suppression 240V Voltage Level functions acti OV Inhbt VoltLvl 700 to 780 480V Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Factory Setting 150 For Normal Duty ND Rating Factory Setting 120 Parameters 32 Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Parameter No Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Level Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Width Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Lvl Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Wdth Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Frequency Reference Level at Loss Frequency Fref at Floss Number of Auto Restart Attempts Num of Restarts Auto Restart Operation Selection Restart Sel Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Reference Detection These parameters configure the multi function output 2 00 settings Fref Fout agree 1 Fref Set agree 1 Frequency detection 1 and Frequency detection 2 Parameter L4 01 sets the level while parameter L4 02 sets the hysteresis for the speed detection output function These parameters configure the mul
228. ions using a host computer detailed examples of a CRC generation using Quick Basic and in C are shown on the following pages Communications 0 6 Typical CRC 16 Calculation Program in Quick Basic crcsumz amp HFFFF amp crcshift amp HO amp amp HAO01 amp CLS PRINT CG a PRINT PRINT CRC 16 Calculator d PRINT PRINT eee 2 2 he so oo sebo o PRINT If entering data in hex precede the data with amp H PRINT Example 32decimal 20hex amp H20 PRINT PRINT INPUT Enter the number of bytes in the message maxbyte FOR bytenum 1 TO maxbyte STEP 1 PRINT Enter byte bytenum INPUT byte amp byte amp byte amp AND amp HFF amp crcsum crcsum byte7 AND amp HFFFF amp FOR shift 1 TO 8 STEP 1 crcshift t INT crcsum amp 2 AND amp H7FFF amp IF crcsum AND amp H1 amp THEN crcsum crcshift crcconst ELSE crcsum crceshift END IF NEXT shift NEXT bytenum lower amp crcsum AND upper amp INT crcsum 256 AND amp amp PRINT Lower byte 1st HEX lower amp PRINT Upper byte 2nd HEX upper amp Typical CRC 16 Calculation Program in C buf pointer to character array that contains the characters used to calculate CRC number of characters to calculate for pointer t
229. ir factory default settings Auto Tuning The Drive can be programmed in this menu A TUNE Use this menu to Auto Tune the Drive in order to optimize motor control The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically after successfully completing Auto Tuning Digital Operator 3 6 Main Menu Structure The menu selection display will appear when the MENU is pressed from a monitor or setting display While viewing the menu selection display press the MENU repeatedly to scroll between the menu selections Press the DATA ENTER key to enter the desired menu selection MENU DRIVE Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Programming VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts A TUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Fig 3 2 Main Menu Structure Digital Operator 3 7 Operation Menu DRIVE This menu is used for setting the frequency reference Local Mode or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current It is also used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces The Drive must be in this menu in order to run See parameter b1 08 Run Command Selection During Program BU1 Monitor List Follow the key operations below Fig 3 3 to access the Operation Menu DRIVE Main Menu Operation Fig 3 3 U1 Monitor
230. ired for NEMA Type 1 IEC IP20 Front cover Digital Operator Nameplate Terminal cover Bottom protective cover Fig 1 4 Drive Appearance Control circuit terminal SERE layout label Main circuit terminals fet Control circuit terminals See Fig 2 3 for actual terminal layout Charge indicator Ground terminal Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 5 Models CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 The external appearance component names and terminal arrangement of the Drive are shown in Fig 1 6 and 1 7 _ Mounting holes Drive cover Front cover _ Cooling fan Digital Operator 7 Terminal cover Fig 1 6 Drive Appearance circuit terminal layout label Control circuit terminals Charge indicator See Fig 2 3 for actual terminal layout Main circuit terminals Ground terminal 2748 Ground te
231. is running Parameters A 36 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Setting Factory Range Setting Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display a Monitor Selec 01 01 User Monitor Selection Selects which monitor will be displayed in the operation menu User Monitor Sel upon power up when 1 02 4 Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power up User Monitor Selection After 1 Frequency Reference U1 01 01 02 Power Up 2 Output Frequency U1 02 Power On Monitor 3 Output Current U1 03 4 User Monitor set by o1 01 Sets the units of the Frequency References 41 01 to 91 17 the Frequency Reference Monitors 01 01 01 02 U1 05 and the Modbus communication frequency reference 0 Hz 96 100 E1 04 2 to 39 RPM Enter the number of motor poles Digital Operator Display 40 to 39999 User display Selection Set the number desired at maximum Display Scaling d add Number of digits from the right of the decimal point Description Vector Example 1 01 03 12000 will result in frequency reference from 0 0 to 200 0 200 0 2 Fmax Example 2 01 03 21234 will result in frequency reference from 0 00 to 12 34 12 34 Fmax Setting unit for frequency Sets the setting units related to V F pattern frequency related parameters related to V F parameters 1 04 06 09 11 characteristics 0 Hertz Display Un
232. ith PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 Basic Programming 5 17 Table 5 6 lists the factory settings of V F patterns when open loop vector or flux vector control method is selected A1 02 2 or 3 Table 5 6 V F Pattern for 200V Class Drives Factory Setting 00000 Setting Parameter No Name Unit Max Output Frequency Max Output Voltage Base Frequency Mid Output Frequency Mid Output Voltage Min Output Frequency Min Output Voltage 1 For 400V class units the voltage values are twice that of 200V class units 2 These default values are for open loop vector or flux vector control methods A1 02 2 or 3 Basic Programming 5 18 Motor Setup B 2 01 Motor Rated Current Setting Range Model Dependent Factory Default Model Dependent The Motor Rated Current parameter E2 01 is used by the Drive to protect the motor and for proper Vector control when using Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector control methods A1 02 2 or 3 The motor protection parameter L1 01 is enabled by default Set E2 01 to the full load amps FLA stamped on the motor s nameplate During Auto Tuning it is required for the operator to enter the motor s rated current T1 04 in the Auto Tuning menu If the Auto Tuning operation completes successfully the value entered into T1 04 will automatically be written into E2 01 B 2 04 Number of Motor Poles Setting Range 2048 Factory Default 4
233. its 1 RPM 01 05 LCD Brightness Adjustment Sets the contrast of the Digital Operator LCD A setting of 17 is LCD Contrast the lightest contrast and a setting of 5 is the darkest contrast Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running 01 04 Parameters A 37 Parameter No Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Local Remote Key Function Selection Local Remote Key STOP Key Function Selection Oper STOP Key User Parameter Default Value User Defaults Drive kVA Selection Inverter Model Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection Operator M O P Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Oper Detection Cumulative Operation Time Setting Elapsed Time Set Cumulative Operation Time Selection Elapsed Time Run Initialization Specification Selection Init Mode Sel Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Fan ON Time Set Fault Trace Fault History Clear Function FLT Trace Init kWh User Monitor Initialization kWH MonitorClear Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Setting Factory Description Setting Key Selections Determines if the Digital Operator Local Remote key is functional 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Flux Vector Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operator will stop the Drive when Drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Allows
234. ive is in the LOCAL mode When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode the SEQ indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection See Table 3 3 Table 3 3 REMOTE Sequence SEQ Indicator Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set to terminal strip communications or an option board as indicated below On b1 02 1 Terminals 2 Communications 3 Option PCB Parameter b1 02 Run Command Selection is set to Digital Operator as indicated below b1 02 0 Operator Digital Operator 3 4 REMOTE Reference REF Indicator The status of the REMOTE Reference REF indicator is shown in Table 3 4 This indicator is always when the Drive is in the LOCAL mode When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode the REF indicator status is dependent on the setting of parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection See Table 3 4 Table 3 4 REMOTE Reference REF Indicator Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to terminal strip communications option board or pulse train as indicated below On b1 01 1 Terminals 2 Communications 3 Option PCB 4 Pulse Train Parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is set to digital operator as indicated below b1 0120 Operator Run Indicator The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3 5 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode ___________
235. ives to EMC Directive Yaskawa Drives are not required to be installed in an EMC compatible enclosure Itis not possible to give detailed instructions for all possible types of installations therefore this manual provides general guidelines electrical equipment produces radio and line borne interference at various frequencies The power leads pass this on to the surrounding environment like an antenna Connecting an item of electrical equipment e g Drive to a supply without a line filter can allow High Frequency HF or Low Frequency LF interference to penetrate the power distribution system The basic countermeasures are isolation of the wiring of control and power components proper grounding and shielding of cables A large contact area is necessary for low impedance grounding of HF interference The use of grounding straps instead of cables is therefore highly recommended Cable shields must be connected with ground clips CE certification for EMC can be achieved using the line filters specified in this manual and following the appropriate installa tion instructions Cable Installation Measures against line borne interference Use a power cable with a well grounded shield Use a shielded motor cable not exceeding 82 feet 25m in length Arrange all grounds to maximize the end of the lead area in contact with ground e g metal plate Use a shielded cable with braided shield and ground the maximum possible area of th
236. k application machine status to eliminate fault Overshooting Undershooting Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 Overspeed was occurring parameter group OS The motor speed feedback U1 05 l Tis tetiere was too hish Check the reference circuit and Overspeed Det exceeded the value set in F1 08 for a time gh reference gain Flashing longer than the setting in F1 09 Detected when A1 02 1 or 3 and F1 03 3 The settings in F1 08 and 1 09 Check the settings in F1 08 and were not appropriate F1 09 Check the input circuit and reduce the input power to within specifications High input voltage at R L1 DC Bus Overvoltage S L2 and T L3 The DC bus voltage has exceeded the trip OV point Extend the time in C1 02 or other ion time i active decel settings used such as DC Bus Overvolt Default time is set too Mice cm 2 Flashing 208 240Vac Trip point is 410Vdc NEEE SAE 480 Trip point is 820Vdc time Detected when the Drive is in a stopped condition E1 01 affects the trip level Power factor correction Remove the power factor capacitors are being used on the input or output to the Drive There was a break in the PG Fix the broken disconnected wiring wiring PG Disconnection PGO Detected when F1 02 3 and 1 02 1 The PG was wired incorrectly or 3 PG Open Detected when no PG encoder pulses are Power wasn t being supplied to pow r tothe PG probed Flashing received for a
237. l check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust the P I and D parameters Disable Integral I and Derivative time D control Reduce the proportional gain P until hunting stops Reintroduce the integral function starting with long integral time values to eliminate the P offset Reintroduce the derivative time and adjust with small increments to eliminate oscillation Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 24 If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped due to a large internal load DC injection braking may be necessary Adjust the DC injection braking as follows Increase parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop Increase parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to the Frequency Reference Use the following information if the output frequency does not match the frequency reference BThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width d3 04 settings are suitable BThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Freq Ref Upper Limit Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference
238. l S8 is ON Output terminal status 000000 Multi function Output 1 Terminal 1 2 is ON Multi function Output 2 Terminal M3 M4 is ON Multi function Output 3 Terminal M5 M6 is ON Not used Fault output Terminal MA MB MC is ON Parameters 40 Display Units Set by 01 03 Table A 2 F7 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name ae Digital Operator Display Description Pispa y Mats Internal Drive status 01010 01010 During running During zero speed During reverse During reset signal input UI 12 m Status During speed agree Drive operation ready During fault detection Minor fault 1 During fault detection Major fault Cumulative Operation Time 7 y Software Number TIN 7 4 FLASH ID Last 5 digits of the Drive s software number Terminal A1 Input Voltage Term A1 Level Input voltage on Terminal A1 as a percentage of 10Vdc Terminal A2 Input Voltage Displays the input current or voltage on Terminal A2 as a Term A2 level percentage of 10Vdc Terminal A3 Input Voltage Term A3 level 1 Input voltage on Terminal as a percentage of 10Vdc Motor Secondary Current Iq Mot SEC Current Motor Excitation Current 14 Mot EXC Current Current being used by the motor f
239. l communication is controller has stopped Flashing established the connection was lost communicating Check all connections verify all user side software configurations Connection was not made properly or user software was Check all connections verify all not configured to the proper user side software configurations established Flashing baud rate or configuration CALL Serial communication transmission SI F G ComCall error Communication has not yet been CE Normal communication was not ATP Modbus Communications Error Check the communications MEMOBUS Com Err Enabled when H5 05 1 and H5 04 3 Dose dor 2 seconds or longer devices and signals Flashing after control data was received The load was locked Reduce the load E The acceleration time and 3 Excessive Speed Deviation Lengthen the acceleration and DEV Detected when F1 04 3 and 1 02 1 3 Me times were too FOROS Speed Deviation The speed deviation is greater than the saor Flashing 2 E 1 10 for longer than the setting The load was too large Check the mechanical system in F1 11 The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 Check the settings in F1 10 and were not appropriate 1 11 Check the input terminal programmed for enable command DNE Detected when a multi function digital Enable command was lost while Drive not Enable input H1 01 to H1 06 is programmed for Drive was running Flashing 6A Drive enabl
240. lects a motor capable of cooling itself over a 10 1 speed range when running at 100 load The OL1 function derates the motor when it is running at 1 10 of its rated speed or less Setting L1 01 3 selects a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed when running at 10046 load This includes zero speed The OL function does not derate the motor at any speed If the Drive is connected to a single motor the motor overload protection should be enabled L1 01 1 2 or 3 unless another means of preventing motor thermal overload is provided When the electronic thermal overload function is activated an OL1 fault occurs shutting OFF the Drive s output thus preventing additional overheating of the motor The motor temperature is continually calculated as long as the Drive is powered up When operating several motors with one Drive install a thermal relay on each motor and disable the motor overload protection L1 01 0 Basic Programming 5 21 Stall Prevention L3 04Stall Prevention During Deceleration Selection 00 Disabled General purpose Enabled factory default Intelligent stall prevention Enabled Stall prevention with DB resistor Enabled The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during deceleration If L3 04 0 stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short enough the Drive may fault and stop If
241. lly program the values of all other parameters listed in Table B 2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating Table B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Voltage F7 Model Number 02 04 Setting CIMR F7U20P4 0 CIMR F7U20P7 1 CIMR F7U21P5 2 CIMR F7U22P2 3 CIMR F7U23P7 4 CIMR F7U25P5 5 208 240 Vac CIMR F7U27P5 6 CIMR F7U2011 7 CIMR F7U2015 8 CIMR F7U2018 9 CIMR F7U2022 A CIMR F7U2030 B CIMR F7U2037 C CIMR F7U2045 D CIMR F7U2055 E CIMR F7U2075 F CIMR F7U2090 10 CIMR F7U2110 11 CIMR F7U40P4 20 CIMR F7U40P7 21 CIMR F7U41P5 22 CIMR F7U42P2 23 CIMR F7U43P7 24 CIMR F7U44P0 25 CIMR F7U45P5 26 CIMR F7U47P5 27 CIMR F7U4011 28 CIMR F7U4015 29 CIMR F7U4018 2A CIMR F7U4022 2B denne CIMR F7U4030 2C CIMR F7U4037 2D CIMR F7U4045 2E CIMR F7U4055 2F CIMR F7U4075 30 CIMR F7U4090 31 CIMR F7U4110 32 CIMR F7U4132 33 CIMR F7U4160 34 CIMR F7U4185 35 CIMR F7U4220 36 CIMR F7U4300 37 Capacity Related Parameters B 2 Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting The factory setting of the parameters in Table B 2 may change when the Drive capacity is changed via parameter 02 04 See Table B 3 and B 4 for a complete list Table B 2 Parameters Affected by 02 04 Parameter Parameter Name Parameter Parameter Name Number Digital Operator Display Numb
242. log input 0 to 10Vdc 20 4 to 20mA 2500 3 channels V or I Speed Reference Boards Input resolution 13 bit plus sign bit C 2CN Isolated analog input 0 to 10Vdc 20 4 to 20mA 2500 3 channels V or I Input resolution 13 bit plus sign bit AI 14B2 DI 08 8 bit digital input DI 16H2 16 bit digital input DeviceNet SI NX DeviceNet communications Communications Board Profibus DP SI PX Profibus DP communications Communications Board InterBus S M SI RX InterBus S communications Communications Board CANopen Cominmicutam Band SI SX CANopen communications AO 08 Analog output 8 bit 2 channels Analog Monitor Boards AO 12 Analog output 11 bit plus sign bit 2 channels AO 12B Isolated analog output 11 bit plus sign bit 2 channels DO 08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs Digital Output Boards DO 02C 2 relay outputs PO 36F Pulse train output Electrical Installation 2 30 Installation Before mounting an Option Board remove power from the Drive and wait for the CHARGE LED to go out Remove the Digital Operator front cover and option clip Option Clip can be easily removed by squeezing the protruding portions of the clip and then pulling it out Then mount the Option The A Option Board uses a mounting spacer to secure the board to the control board Insert the mounting spacer as
243. lts Ue Pl COPY Function Faule Main Circuit Test Procedure LEN ID Drive Date Stamp IOUS Table of Contents viii Chapter TPIT UNE M Per Dam SEO UE TET TR Periodic Maintenance of Panis Heatsink Cooling Fan BepiBebeimenll D Removing and Mounting the Terminal 7 7 Appendix e C 1 F7 Parametar Ui F7 Monitor List F7 Fault Trace List cunctae TS ERECTO NIENTE EN ae F7 Fault Trace DONNE U Appendix B Capacity Related B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Parameters Affected by Drive Setting POT e Appendix C 1 Standard Drive Specifications C 2 Appendix D Communications a eer sneered Md Using i PTT L Modbus Function Code 5 8 Modbus Data Tables M
244. menu is used to set read every parameter in the Drive Follow the key operations below Fig 3 7 to access the Programming Menu ADV ADV Initialization Main Menu Programming Select Language Fig 3 7 Programming Menu Access Procedure gt Use y and keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list For complete parameter listing see appendix A F2 ALI4 Setup 01 08 16 Setup FA 08 12 Setup F5_DO 02 08 Setup F Communications Option Setup HI Digital Inputs H2 Digital Outputs Analog Inputs H4 Analog Outputs 5 Serial Communications Setup Pulse Setup LI Motor Overload L2 PowerLoss Ridethru C3 Meotor Slip Compensation L Stall Prevention C4 Torque Compensation L4 Reference Detection C5 Tuning Fault Restart C6 Carrier Frequency L L6 Torque Detection L Torque Limit Preset Reference Hardware Protection 1 3 5 7 d2 Reference Limits L8 d Jump Frequencies 1 Hunting Prevention 3 5 1 3 1 d4 Sequence amp Trim Control n2 AFR Tuning High Slip Braking Feed Forward d6 Field Weakening 1 1 V F Pattern E2 Motor Setup 3 VJF Pattern 2 1 Monitor Select 02 Key Selections COPY Function Auto Tuning 1 1 3 d5 Torque Control E E n n n 0 E4 Motor Setup 2 T PG Option Setup Note Refer to Appendix A for control method dependent programming parameter groups Digital Operato
245. minal FM Gain Setting Sets terminal FM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when 0 0 to 100 0 Terminal FM Gain selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting Sets terminal AM output voltage in percent of 10Vdc when 0 0 to 50 0 Terminal AM Gain selected monitor is at 100 output 1000 0 BV Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 based on the Motor Overload Protection cooling capacity of the motor 3 0 Disabled L1 01 Selection Otol 1 MOL Fault Select 1 Standard Fan Cooled lt 10 1 motor 2 Standard Blower Cooled 10 1 motor 3 Vector Motor 1000 1 motor When using a braking resistor use setting 0 Setting 3 is used in very specific applications 0 Disabled The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate Tf the load is too large or the deceleration time is too short an OV fault may occur gt General Purpose The Drive decelerates at the active Stall Prevention Selection Dok cap deceleration rate but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches L3 04 During Decel s 0to3 1 StallP Decel Sel the stall prevention level 380 760 Vdc deceleration will stop Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level 2 Intelligent The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w o hitting OV fault level Range C1 02 10 3 Stall Prevention w Braking Resistor Denotes that parameter can b
246. mode the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source Parameter b1 02 specifies from where the RUN command will be accepted To issue a run command from the Digital Operator Set b1 02 0 and use the RUN and STOP keys on the Digital Operator to start and stop the Drive To issue the run command from the terminals Set b1 02 1 and select between 2 wire and 3 wire operation according to the following 2 Wire Control The factory setting is for 2 wire operation In the 2 wire configuration a closure between S1 and SN will be interpreted as a Forward run command by the Drive A closure between S2 and SN will be interpreted as a Reverse run command If both S1 and 52 are closed the Drive will alarm and the Digital Operator will flash an EF fault The Drive will not run in this condition FWD Run Stop REV Run Stop Fig 5 1 2 Wire Control 3 Wire Control When any of the multi function digital input parameters H1 01 through 1 05 is set to 0 terminals 51 and 52 become Run and Stop respectively The multi function digital input that was set to 0 will function as Forward Reverse input for the Drive When the Forward Reverse input is open the Drive will run in the Forward direction and when the input is closed the Drive will run in the Reverse direction 3 wire operation a momentary closure gt 50mS between 51 and SN will cause the Drive to run provided that S2 and SN is held closed The Drive will
247. n 2 seconds a CE fault will occur Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data to when the Drive sends data 5 to 65 Enables or disables request to send RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always on 0101 1 Enabled RTS turns on only when sending EXEIE eae Pulse Setup H6 01 02 Pulse Train Input Scaling Pulse In Scaling i 03 Pulse Train Input Gain Pulse Input Gain BA 04 Pulse Train Input Bias Pulse Input Bias E 05 Pulse Train Input Filter Time Pulse In Filter 7 06 ne 07 Terminal RP Pulse Train Input Function Selection Pulse Input Sel Terminal MP Pulse Train Monitor Selection Pulse Moni Sel Pulse Train Monitor Scaling Pulse Moni Scale Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP 0 Frequency reference 1 PID feedback value 0to2 0 2 PID setpoint value Sets the number of pulses in Hz that is equal to the maximum 1000 to 1440H output frequency 1 04 32000 E Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 10096 as a 0 0 to 100 096 1000 0 100 0to 100 0 99 LE percentage of maximum output frequency E1 04 Sets the output level when the pulse train input is OHz as a percentage of maximum output frequency 1 04 Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds Select the pulse train monitor output terminal MP function value of the OO part of 01 00 See Table A2 for the list of U1 monitors Sets the number of output pulses whe
248. n board connected on 2CN 4 Pulse Input Terminal RP Selects the run command input source 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R 5 and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast with Timer A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires Determines the forward rotation of the motor and if reverse operation is disabled 0 Reverse Enabled 1 Reverse Disabled 2 Exchange Phase Change direction of forward motor rotation Operation method when frequency reference is less than minimum output frequency set in E1 09 0 Operates according to frequency reference 1 09 is disabled 1 Output shuts off coast to stop if less than E1 09 2 Operates according to E1 09 frequency reference set to E1 09 3 Zero speed frequency reference of zero is less than E1 09 Sets the scan rate of terminals S1 to S8 0 2ms 2 scans for quick response Sms 2 scans for noisy environments Cycle External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode the Drive will not run Accept External RUN If the run command is closed when switching from local mode to remote mode the Drive WILL run Disabled Run command
249. n digital input terminal S3 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 3 Multi function digital input terminal S4 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 4 Multi function digital input terminal 55 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 5 Multi function digital input terminal 56 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 6 Multi function digital input terminal 57 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 7 Multi function digital input terminal 58 ON 1 OFF 0 Bits 8 to Not used Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits Communications D 14 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Register No Drive status Bit 0 Operation Operating 1 Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed 1 Bit 2 Frequency agree Matched 1 Bit 3 Desired frequency agree Matched 1 Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 1 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency gt 14 01 1 Bit 6 Drive start up completed Start up completed 1 Bit 7 Low voltage detection Detected 1 Bit 8 Baseblock Drive output baseblock 1 Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 1 Communication 0 BitA Run command mode Not communication 1 Communication 0 Bit B Overtorque detection Detected 1 Bit C Frequency reference lost Lost 1 Bit D Retrying error Retrying 1 BitE Error including Modbus communications time out Error occurred 1 Bit F Modbus communications time out
250. n page 2 18 HEAT SINK MOUNT RESISTOR Fig 2 5 Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor on Heat Sink Electrical Installation 2 13 Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation Using Internal Braking Transistor for F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking operation install it in a location away from other equipment 1 Install the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to a noncombustible surface maintaining a minimum 1 97 inches 50mm clearance on each side and a minimum 7 87 inches 200mm clearance on top 2 Remove the Remote Mount Resistor Unit cover to access its terminal block Connect the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to the Drive and to external control circuitry according to Fig 2 6 below Table 2 9 Wire Size for Remote Mount Resistor Unit Wire Size AWG 12 10 18 14 Wire Type 600V Ethylene propylene rubber insulated or equivalent Terminal Screw 4 Power Leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise these signal leads must be grouped separately 3 DUTY CYCLE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY MOUNT RESISTOR Tex EXTERNAL CIRCUIT 120 Terminal markings in parentheses PEIWEN T are for resistors manufactured by E Applies when SC is jumpered to SP and S3 is programmed as External i i Fault
251. n the monitor is 100 in Hz Set H6 06 to 2 and H6 07 to 0 to make the pulse train monitor output synchronous to the output frequency Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 30 0to Control Method Open Flux Loop Vector Vector Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Setting Factory Description Range Setting Open Loop Vector Motor Overload Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 based on the Motor Overload Protection cooling capacity of the motor 0 Disabled 11 01 Selection 0to3 MOL Fault Select 1 Standard Fan Cooled 10 1 motor 2 Standard Blower Cooled gt 10 1 motor 3 Vector Motor X 1000 1 motor Motor Overload Frotection Sets the motor thermal overload protection OL1 time A larger 0 1 to L1 02 Time Mi d 8 0min 11 02 time will increase the time before an OL 1 fault will occur 20 0 MOL Time Const Sets operation selection when the motor temperature analog input Motor Alarm 2 T the OH3 alarm level 1 17V L1 03 Operation Selection 1 to Stop 0to3 Mtr OH Alarm Sel 2 Fast Stop 3 Alarm Only Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input Motor Overheat Fault H3 09 E exceeds the OHA fault level 2 34V L1 04 Operation Selection 0 Ramp to Stop 0to2 Mtr OH Fault Sel 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast Stop Motor Temperature Input This
252. ng section for more details on each parameter Note Not all parameters are available for all Control Methods See Control Method column Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Control Method Selection 1 02 Control Method Frequency Reference b1 01 Selection Reference Source b1 02 Run Command Selection Run Source b1 03 Stopping Method Selection Stopping Method 5 01 m Time 1 m Time 1 A 02 BEN 1 Time 1 BEN 1 Time 1 Carrier Frequency Selection c6 02 CarrierFreq Sel Control Method Method ae Settin Factor Description g Range Setting Selects the Control Method of the Drive 0 V F control without PG 1 V F control with PG 0to3 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Closed Loop Vector Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or d1 01 to d1 17 1 Terminals Analog Input Terminal A1 Terminal A2 sums together with terminal Al when H3 09 0 0to4 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN 4 Pulse Input Selects the run command input source 0 Operator RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operator 1 Terminals Contact closure on terminals S1 or S2 0to3 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R R S and S 3 Option PCB Option board connected on 2CN Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 DC Injection to Stop 3 Coast wi
253. nt Fault Fault Message 9 108 Most Recent Fault Fault Message 10 Cumulative Operation Time at 5 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 5 Cumulative Operation Time at 6 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 6 Cumulative Operation Time at 7 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 7 Cumulative Operation Time at 8 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 8 Cumulative Operation Time at 9 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 9 Cumulative Operation Time at 10 Most Recent Fault Elapsed Time 10 Note Faults such as CPF00 CPF01 CPF02 CPF03 UV1 and UV2 are not stored in fault history 3 Most Recent Fault U3 07 U3 08 1 1 U3 U3 15 U3 16 U3 17 18 U3 19 U3 20 Parameters 43 Notes Parameters 44 Appendix B Capacity Related Parameters This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of 02 04 Drive Capacity Selection i rH RID eie B 2 Parameters Affected by Drive Capacity Setting B 3 Capacity Related Parameters B 1 Drive Capacity Selection Parameter 02 04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number Parameter 02 04 needs to be adjusted only when replacing a control board Do not change the 02 04 setting for any other reason If the Drive s control board is replaced the next time the Drive is powered up parameter 02 04 must be set to the appropriate value listed in Table B 1 for the Drive model number This will automatica
254. ntage of motor rated slip E2 02 Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Determines if the motor magnetic flux is automatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Torque Compensation This parameter sets the gain for the Drive s automatic torque boost function to match the Drive s output voltage to the motor load This parameter helps to produce better starting torque It determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon motor current motor resistance and output frequency This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the torque compensation function Increase to add stability decrease to improve response Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start C4 03 and C4 04 The filter is disabled if the time is set to 4ms or less Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 10 Control Method _ Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Flux Vector 0 0 to 10000 0 to 250 Otol 0 00 to 2 50 0 to 10000 0 0 to 200 0 200 0 to 0 0 0 to 200 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter
255. ntegral control during acceleration deceleration to either enabled or disabled 0 Disabled The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating 1 Enabled The integral function is used at all times Configures the overspeed fault OS detection OS fault will occur if the motor speed feedback is greater than the F1 08 setting for a time longer than F1 09 F1 08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 See F1 03 Configures the speed deviation fault DEV detection DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F1 10 setting for a time longer than F1 11 1 10 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency E1 04 Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the frequency reference command See F1 04 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters 18 Control Method _ Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Vector 0 to 60000 1024 0to3 gt 0to3 0to3 1 to 132 0101 0 to 120 115 10 0 0 to 2 0 0 to 50 0 0 to 10 0 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Setting Factory No Description Open Loop Vector Digital Operator Display Range Setting F1 12 Number of PG gear teeth 1 PG Gear Teeth1 Sets the gear ratio between the motor shaft and the encoder PG Input pulses from PG PPR x 60 F1
256. ntents 03H Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Drive Command Message Response Message During Normal Operation Response Message During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H Address Lower 20H Ist storage Higher 00H CRC 16 Higher FIH Higher 00H register Lower 65H Lower Quantity Lower 04H Nextstorage Higher 00H Higher 45H register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Next storage Higher 00H register Lower 00H Nextstorage Higher 01H register Lower Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H Fig D 6 Function Code 03H Message Example Write In Single Holding Register 06H Command Message Slave address Register Address CRC 16 Setting Data Lower OBH Lower 01H 06H 00H 01H 00H 03H 98H Response Message During Normal Operation Slave address Setting Higher 01H 06H 00H 01H 00H 03H 98H Lower OBH
257. ny parity check method used for the individual characters of the message The CRC field is two bytes containing 16 bit binary value The CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device which appends the CRC to the message The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field If the two values are not equal an error results The is started by first preloading a 16 bit register to all 175 Then a process begins of applying successive 8 bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register Start and stop bits and the parity bit 1f one is used do not apply to the CRC During generation of the CRC each 8 bit character is exclusive OR ed with the register contents Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit LSB with a zero filled into the most significant bit MSB position The LSB is extracted and examined If the LSB is a 1 the register is then exclusive OR ed with a preset fixed balue A001h If the LSB is a 0 no exclusive OR takes place This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed After the last eighth shift the next 8 bit byte is exclusive OR ed with the register s current value and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above The final contents of the register after all the bytes of the message have been applied is the CRC value For applicat
258. o 255 0V 240V Models 310 0V to 510 0V 480V Models Factory Defaults 230 0V 240V Models 460 0V 480V Models Set the Input Voltage parameter E1 01 to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive i e Overvoltage Built in Braking Transistor Turn on Stall Prevention etc E1 01 also serves as the Maximum Base Voltage used by the Preset V F curves 1 03 0 to E WARNING DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE MUST BE SET IN E1 01 FOR THE PRO TECTIVE FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND OR PERSONAL INJURY V F Pattern B 1 03 V F Pattern Selection SENE Basic Programming 5 11 This parameter is only available in the V F or V F with PG control methods A1 02 0 or 1 The Drive operates utilizing a set V F pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed There are 15 different preset V F patterns to select from E1 03 0 to E with varying voltage profiles base level base level frequency at which maximum voltage is reached and maximum frequencies There are also settings for Custom V F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E1 04 through E1 13 E1 03 F selects a custom V F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E1 03 FF selects a custom V F pattern without an upper voltage limit See Fig 5 8 below for the upper
259. o flux vector control Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 20 If Motor Deceleration is Slow The following causes are possible deceleration time is long even when a braking resistor is connected The following causes are possible Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When a braking resistor is connected set parameter L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration to 0 disabled or 3 with braking resistor When this parameter is set to 1 enabled factory default the stall prevention function will interfere with the braking resistor The deceleration time setting is too long Check the active deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 or C1 08 Motor torque is insufficient If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault then the motor s power may be insufficient Consider increasing the motor and Drive s capacity The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit is reached L7 01 to L7 04 the motor torque will be limited This can cause the deceleration time to be extended Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable If a torque limit has been set for the multi function analog input terminals 2 or parameters 3 09 or H3 05 set value 10 11 12 or 15 check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable If the Vertical axis Load Drops Droops When a Mechanical Brake is Applied The brak
260. o not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters capacitors or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the Drive These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user doing so will void the warranty This product must not be modified Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power To meet CE directives proper line filters and proper installation are required Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed to describe details These must be replaced before operation Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit boards to prevent ESD damage The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power Clear all personnel from the Drive motor and machine area before applying power Secure covers couplings shaft keys and machine loads before energizing the Drive Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual B Intended Use Drives ar
261. o the array that contains the calculated CRC void getMBCRC cahr buf int bufLen char unsigned long crc 0 Declare and initialize variables unsigned long crc 1 0x0000 int ij for 1 0 i lt bufLen i Loop through characters of input array crc 0 unsigned long buf i amp OxOff current character with OxOOff for j 0 j lt 8 j Loop through character bits crc 1 crc 0 gt gt 1 amp 0 7 Shift result right one place and store if crc 0 amp 0x0001 if pre shifted value bit 0 is set crc 0 crc 1 0 001 XOR the shifted value with 0xa001 else if pre shifted value bit 0 is not set crc 0 crc 1 set the pre shifted value equal to the shifted value crc 0 unsigned 0 256 amp OxOOff Hi byte crc 1 unsigned char crc 0 amp OxOOff Lo byte return Response Message The Drive disregards the command message and does not return the response message in the following cases 1 In simultaneous broadcasting of data slave address field is 0 all slaves execute but do not respond 2 When a communication error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message 3 When the slave address in the command message does not coincide with the address set in the slave 4 When the command message data length is not proper Communications D 7 Modbus Function Code Details Reading Holding Register Co
262. ock Time has expired the Drive will inject DC current into the motor windings to try and lock the motor shaft The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop The level of DC Injection current is set by parameter b2 02 The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency at the time the run command is removed b2 04 x 10 x Output Frequency DC Injection Brake Time Maximum Frequency El 04 ON Run Command b2 04 x 10 OFF DC Injection 100 j Brake Time b2 04 Output Frequency jecti i 10 100 Maximum DC Injection Braking Output Frequency r gt gt Output Frequency at Stop Command Input Minimum Baseblock DC Injection Braking Time Time L2 03 Fig 5 5 DC Injection Braking to Stop IMPORTANT If an overcurrent OC fault occurs during DC Injection Braking to Stop lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 until the fault no longer occurs 3 Coast to Stop with Timer When the run command is removed the Drive will turn off its output transistors and the motor will coast to a stop If a run command is input before the timer expires the Drive will not run and the run command will be ignored The timer value is determined by the active deceleration time and the output frequency when the run command is removed ON Run Command Deceleration OFF Time Timer Value 100 Minimum Bas
263. old the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off U1 01 Frequency displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with a factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check The encoder polarity may need to be reversed Proceed to the Auto Tuning section Start Up 4 9 Auto Tuning Auto Tuning the motor is required for smooth operation Use the following flow chart to determine which one of the three Auto Tuning Mode Selections to use Open loop Vector Flux Vector V F Control or V F w PG Fdbk V F Control Method A1 02 0 or 1 Motor is uncoupled from the load Use Tune No Use Standard Use Term Resistance T1 01 2 Rotate Tuning T1 01 1 T1 01 0 Figure 4 2 Auto Tuning Selection Flow chart iStandard Tuning Always use Standard Tuning when operating in Open Loop Vector or Flux Vector A1 02 2 or 3 and it is possible to run the motor uncoupled from the load 1 Selectthe Auto Tuning Menu Then select Standard Tuning in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter T1 01 0 2 Setthe motor output power T1 02 motor rated voltage T1 03 motor rated current T1 04 motor base frequency
264. oltage Output 0 10Vdc for terminals CH2 Electrical Installation 2 22 Sinking Sourcing Mode The multi function digital input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode 0Vdc common and sourcing mode 24 common by using the terminals SN SC and SP An external power supply can also be connected providing more freedom in signal input methods Table 2 15 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode Az i 4 va ZR P24V 24Vdc Factory Default External Power Supply Sinking Mode External 24 IP24V 24Vdc 4 Internal Power Supply Sourcing Mode eae 51 7N 9 j esr P24V 24Vdc External Power Supply Sourcing Mode External 24 Electrical Installation 2 23 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits 1 Low voltage wires shall be wired with Class 1 wiring 2 Separate control wiring from power motor wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 B1 B2 2 and 3 and other high power lines 3 Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC 2 4 5 and digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals 4
265. ommunication configuration Verify Drive is programmed to receive the PID Feedback source signal Check to ensure the PID Feedback source is installed and working properly Check for dirt build up on the fans and cooling fins Reduce the ambient temperature around the Drive Remove the heating unit Check for an external condition Verify the program parameters H1 01 thru H1 06 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating Alarm Recheck the accel decel time OH3 Detected when A2 or A3 programmed for Overheating of the motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overheat 1 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 E measured by the motor Flashing exceeds 1 17V for time L1 05 and thermistor Recheck the V F pattern E1 01 L1 03 3 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Ensure the values in L6 02 and 013 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Overtorque Det 1 Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor was overloaded 22 Flashing the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 1 or 2 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and 014 Overtorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Overtorque Det 2 Drive output current gt L6 05 for more than Motor was overloaded Flashing the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 1 or 2 Chec
266. op Vector Speed Search Enables disables and selects the speed search function at start 0 Speed Estimation Speed Search Disable Speed search at start is disabled however the estimated speed method is used for multi function input power loss ridethrough auto fault retry Speed Estimation Speed Search Enable The speed estimation method of speed search is enabled at run command Current Detection Speed Search Disable Speed search at 0103 2 start is disabled however the current detection method is used for multi function input power loss ride through auto fault retry Current Detection Speed Search Enable The current detection method of speed search is enabled at run command Speed Estimation Method Motor speed and direction are measured using residual motor flux Current Detection Method Motor speed is measured using current feedback levels unidirectional only 0 1 to 0 0 to 1 00 to Speed Search Selection SpdSrch at Start Speed Search Deactivation Current SpdSrch Current Used only when b3 01 2 or 3 Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage of Drive rated current Speed Search Deceleration Time SpdSrch Dec Time Speed Search Delay Time Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to Search Delay allow time for an external output contactor to re energize Speed Search Detection Compensation Gain Srch Detect Comp Used only when b3 01 s
267. or AC 3 Phase induction motors This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive AC Drive AFD ASD VFD VSD and Inverter In this manual the F7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive The LCD keypad operator is equipped with local remote functions copy feature 7 language choices and 5 lines of display with 16 characters per line User parameter settings be recovered at any time via user initialization when enabled Optional Drive Wizard software allows upload download as well as graphing and monitoring of Drive parameters from a PC for ease of Drive management This manual may describe trademarked equipment which is the property of other companies who are the registered owners Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product These documents may be provided with the product or upon request Contact Yaskawa Electric America Inc as required Documents may include the following TM F7 02 Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product TM F7 01 Manual included on CD ROM with product DriveWizard Software and Manual Included on CD ROM with product Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the Yaskawa website www drives com The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made T
268. or details are stored until an error reset is input errors can be reset while the Drive is operating Note Write 0 to all unused bits Do not write data to reserved or Not Used registers and bits Communications D 13 Table D 5 Monitor Data Continued Fault details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC or Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Drive overload OL2 Bit 3 Drive overheat OH1 OH2 Bit4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or Overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit A PG open detected PGO Overspeed OS or Speed deviation DEV Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV alarm Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 Soft charge circuit error UV3 Bit D Output phase loss LF Bit E Modbus communication error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit C Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used Frequency reference 01 01 Output frequency U1 02 Output voltage reference U1 06 Output current U1 03 Output power U1 08 Torque reference U1 09 Not used Not used Sequence input status Bit 0 Input terminal S1 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 1 Input terminal S2 ON 1 OFF 0 Bit 2 Multi functio
269. or excitation 14 Output Frequency After Soft Start Frequency reference speed command after the accel and 0 01Hz SFS Output decel ramps and S curve Current being used by the motor to produce torque 14 ASR Output with Filter Output from the speed control loop ASR 0 01 ASR Output w The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 10096 ve e PI Feedback Value PM AD PID Feedback Feedback signal level when PID control is used 0 0196 DI 16H2 Input Status Reference value from aDI 16H2 Digital Reference Card The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on Set by F3 01 DI 16 Reference user constant F3 01 CR VQ ence Internal voltage reference for motor secondary current control 0 1Vac 2 2 2 24 25 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ASR Input Input error to the speed control loop ASR 0 01 ASR Input The maximum output frequency 1 04 corresponds to 100 Mo U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U Do RN ACRGD Data d axis Current control output value for the motor excitation current Parameter number causing an OPE fault Ul Ul re chi Sip 1 i Zero Servo Pulse Count Number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when Zero Servo Pulse stopped at zero servo 1 3 1 3 3 7 0 1 2 6 8 9 6 PID Input Input error to the PID regulator 0 01 PID Input PID Setpoint PID Feedback 01 37 PID Output Output of the PID regulator as a pe
270. ormation After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display 2 0 00 Tuning Ready Press the RUN key to start Auto Tuning The Drive will set the required motor parameters automatically while energizing the motor without rotation for approximately 1 minute If the Auto Tuning is successful the operator keypad will display Tune Successful Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section iB Terminal Resistance Tuning Terminal Resistance Tuning is the only Auto Tuning method available when using V F or V F w Feedback control A1 02 0 or 1 1 2 3 4 Select the Auto Tuning Menu Then select Term Resistance in the Tuning Mode Sel parameter T1 01 2 Set the motor output power T 1 02 and motor rated current T1 04 obtained from the motor nameplate information After entering all of the motor parameters press the UP key to display OHz 0 00A Tuning Ready Press the RUN key to start Auto Tuning The Drive will set the required motor parameter automatically while energizing the motor without rotation for approximately 30 seconds If the Auto Tuning is successful the Digital Operator keypad will display Tune Successful Proceed to the Quick Setting Parameters section Start Up 4 11 Quick Setting Parameters The following Drive parameters located in the Quick Setting menu need to be set according to the application Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Programmi
271. output current torque exceeds the torque value set in parameter L6 02 for more time than is set in parameter L6 03 Loss of Reference Closed When the Drive has detected a loss of the analog frequency reference Frequency reference is considered lost when it drops 90 in 0 4 seconds Parameter L4 05 determines Drive reaction to a loss of frequency reference Braking Resistor Fault Closed When braking resistor or transistor is overheating or has faulted Only active when L8 01 1 E Fault Closed When the Drive experiences a major fault F Not Used 10 Minor Fault Alarm Closed When Drive experiences an alarm Continued on following page Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 24 Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Terminal Function Selection Term 3 4 Sel Terminal M5 M6 Function Selection Term M5 M6 Sel Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Reset Command Active Closed When the Drive receives a reset command from a digital input terminal or serial communication Timer Output Output for independent timer controlled by b4 01 and b4 02 Used in conjunction with the digital input 0 18 timer function Fref Fout Agree 2 Closed When Drive output frequency equals the frequency reference the hysteresis of L4 04 Fref Set Agree 2 Closed When the Drive output frequency and the frequ
272. owing run stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on A WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS 14 Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off Frequency U1 01 now displays 6 00Hz the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Reference with factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check 15 Proceed to the Auto Tuning section Start Up 4 6 V F w PG Start up O 1 8 See Drive Start Up Procedures on Page 4 5 9 Apply input power to the Drive O 10 Set the control method of the Drive to V F w PG Feedback Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 1 V F w PG Fdbk Ensure the DATA ENTER key is pressed to enter the selection in the Drive Entry Accepted will briefly appear 11 Set the Drive input voltage measured in Step 1 In the Quick Setting menu go to parameter 1 01 Voltage This parameter sets the nom
273. parameter adjusts the filter on the motor temperature analog 0 00 to L1 05 Filter Time input H3 09 E Increase to add stability decrease to improve 10 00 Mtr Temp Filter response Power Loss Ridethru n order for a restart to occur the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period 12 02 Loss s the power loss ride thru time This value is dependent on the PwrL Ridethru t apacity of the Drive Only effective when L2 01 1 Sets the minimum time to wait to allow the residual motor voltage Momentary Power Loss d befi 2 lt back oa duri loss 12 03 Minimum Base Block Time to decay before the Drive output turns back on during power loss 5 ride thru After a power loss if L2 03 is greater than L2 02 Enables and disables the momentary power loss function 0 Disabled Drive trips on UV1 fault when power is lost 1 Power Loss Ride Thru Time Drive will restart if power returns Momentary Power Loss M 4 within the time set in L2 02 L2 01 Detection Selection m 8 2 CPU Power Active Drive will restart if power returns prior to PwrL Selection control power supply shut down EXT operation resumes after the time set in L2 03 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Sets the time it takes the output voltage to return to the preset V F 0 0 to L2 04 Time pattern after speed search current detection mode is complete 5 0sec PwrL V F Ramp t Und Detect Se
274. pd Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA Sel Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued This parameter assists in protecting the output transistors from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low 6Hz and less 0 Disabled 1 Enabled L8 18 is active Control Method Setting Range Factory Setting Open Loop Flux Vector Vector Enables and disables the software current limit function Consult the factory before disabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled pes Hunting Prevention 1 01 1 02 Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Hunting Prevention Gain Setting Hunt Prev Gain Speed Feedback Detection Control AFR Gain AFR Gain Speed Feedback Detection Control AFR Time Constant AFR Time Speed Feedback Detection Control AFR Time Constant 2 AFR Time 2 High Slip Braking Deceleration Frequency Width HSB Decel Width High Slip Braking Current Limit HSB Current Ref High Slip Braking Dwell Time at Stop HSB DwelTim Stp High Slip Braking Overload Time HSB OL Time If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded hunting prevention may reduce the vibration 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 00 to 2 50 Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and 1 01 1 increase the gain by 0 1 until vibration ceases If the motor stalls while 11 01 1 decrease the gain by 0 1 until the stalling ceases AFR Tuning
275. pe F7 Parameter ati ote a on ae A 3 A 40 F7 Fa lt Trace EISE oic tr ora A 43 F7 Fault History 8 Qe dut oe Roe cece A 43 Parameters A 1 Some parameters in the following tables are not available for all Control Methods A1 02 Use the key below to determine which parameters are available for the selected Control Method o ctu Parameters which can be monitored and set in either Quick Setting or Advanced Programming Menu A Parameters which can be monitored and set in only Advanced Programming Menu Parameters which cannot be monitored or set for the selected Control Method Parameters 2 F7 Parameter List Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Control Method Parameter Parameter Name gt Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting V F Mi ane Flux PG Vector Vector pneu initialization Language selection for the Digital Operator This parameter is not reset to the factory setting by A1 03 0 English E 1 Japanese 2 2 Deutsch 0to 6 0 A A A A 3 Francais 4 Italiano 5 Espanol 6 Portugues Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital Operator 1 01 Access Level Selection 0 Operation Only 0to2 2 A A A Access Level 1 User Level only available if A2 parameters have been set 2 Advanced Level Selects the Control Method of the Drive Control Method Selection 0 V F control without PG A1 02 Cont
276. peed search 2 or 3 Sets the deceleration time during Sets the gain for the frequency at which the Drive starts speed estimation speed search Use only when b3 01 0 or 1 This parameter enables the Drive to detect the direction of rotation of the motor during speed search Selection NT Bidir Search Sel 0 Disable Drive uses frequency reference direction 1 Enable Drive uses detected direction m COCA Delay Timers Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi Bi directional Speed Search Timer Function ON Delay function digital output programmed for the timer function This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed and the digital output is energized Time Delay ON Timer Timer Function OFF Delay Time Delay OFF Timer function digital output programmed for the timer function This input is opened PID Contra This parameter determines the function of the PID control 0 Disabled 1 D Feedback 2 D Feed Forward 3 Freq Ref PID output D Feedback 4 Freq Ref PID output D Feed Forward PID Function Setting PID Mode E 03 Intregral Time Setting Sets the integral time for the PID controller A setting of zero PID I Time disables integral control 04 Intregral Limit Setting Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator Set as a PIDILimit percentage 76 of maximum frequency b5 05 Derivative Time Sets D control deriva
277. plays Description Drive Setting Error Parameter Setting Out of Range Multi function Input Selection Error Run Command Selection Error The run command selection parameter b1 02 is set to 3 but no option board is installed Control Method Selection Error Multi function Analog Input Error Function Selection Error Cause The control board was replaced and the parameter is set incorrectly Parameter setting was outside of the allowable range In some cases parameter range may depend on other parameter settings For example when E2 03 gt E2 01 Duplicate functions were selected up down commands or trim control increase decrease were not set simultaneously Speed search from maximum frequency and set frequency were set simultaneously PID is enabled and up input is programmed More than one of the speed search inputs were set simultaneously or HSB and KEB functions were set simultaneously N O and N C fast stop are both set or Drive enable and DC injection input are both set Serial communication or other option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly Control method with PG feedback was selected A1 02 1 3 buta PG option board is not installed or is installed incorrectly Duplicate functions were selected for the analog inputs A2 and A3 or for either of the analog inputs A2 or A3 and the pulse input RP selection H3 09 B and H6 01 1 H3 09 C and H6
278. put and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430 150 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current 3 Models 2110 4220 4300 have an overload rating of 120 of rated output current for 60 seconds 4 3 wire phase shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12 pulse rectification 5 2kHz is the Maximum carrier frequency value and default carrier frequency value for all models 6 Each value shown is the Maximum carrier frequency and default carrier frequency Specifications C 4 The following specifications apply to both 200Vac and 400Vac Class Drives Table C 3 Common F7 Drive Specifications Model Number Specification CIMR F7U i Sine wave V F control V F control with PG Open Loop Vector control Flux Vector Control Speed control range 100 1 1000 1 with PG Speed control accuracy 0 2 30 0296 with PG 77 F 50 F 25 10 C Speed response 5Hz 30Hz with PG Torque limit Can be set by parameter analog input or serial communication 4 quadrant control Control method
279. quency Selection 4 12 5 9 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 COaSt to SLOP EE 5 6 Communication Connection Terminal D 3 Communication Specifications esses D 2 COMMUNICATIONS tere ee iens D 1 Component Names eee 1 5 1 6 3 2 Control Circuit e 1 13 1 16 2 14 2 15 2 24 2 36 4 3 4 4 6 2 6 3 6 8 6 12 Preventive Maintenance see 7 3 Terminal Functions 2 2 20 15 power output 2222 2 20 2 COMMON eee 2 20 24 internal 2 20 15 power output 2 2400242221 2 20 Add to terminal Al 2 20 Analog common 2 20 2 21 Analog input or speed command 2 20 Aux frequency reference 1 22 2 2 2 20 Digital input common eee 2 20 During run contact esses 2 20 External baseblock N O 2 20 External fault input esses 2 20 Fault output signal SPDT 2 20 Fault reset ORTI 2 20 Forward run stop command 2 20 Frequency agree contact 2 20 Jog frequency reference 2 20 Modbus communication input
280. quency reference is set from the SI F G Option Card b1 01 3 b1 02 3 and communication is lost PID Feedback Loss This alarm occurs when PID Feedback Loss Detection is programmed to alarm b5 12 1 and the PID feedback lt PID feedback loss detection level b5 13 for the PID feedback loss detection time b5 14 Cooling Fin Cooling Fin Fan Overheat The temperature of the Drive s heatsink exceeded the temperature programmed in parameter L8 02 Enabled when L8 03 3 Drive overheat alarm signal is input from a multi function digital input terminal S3 S8 H1 01 to H1 06 that is programmed for B overheat alarm Cause An external fault condition exists that was connected to a multi function digital input Communication has been lost to the SI F G option card connected and b1 01 3 and or b1 0223 PID Feedback source e g transducer sensor build ing automation signal was not installed correctly or was not working Cooling fan s were not working high ambient temperature a heat source in close proximity to Drive present or dirty heatsink An external overheat condition exists that was connected to one of the multi function input terminals S3 S8 Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 10 Corrective Action Eliminate the cause of an external fault condition Check the communications signals Check the settings of b1 01 and b1 02 Check the setting of F6 01 Check the host side master c
281. r 3 12 Modified Constants Menu VERIFY This menu is used to set read the parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings Follow the key operations below Fig 3 8 to access the Modified Constants Parameter Menu VERIFY Main Menu See Note 1 Modified Consts Fig 3 8 Modified Constants Menu Access Procedure Note 1 If there are no parameters that have been modified from their original factory default settings then the display will state None Modified Otherwise use and keys to scroll through the Modified Constants list Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE This menu is used to Auto Tune the Drive in order to calculate the required motor parameters to optimize motor performance Ideally perform Auto Tuning with the motor uncoupled from the load When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load perform static or terminal resistance Auto Tuning To set motor parameters by hand calculation contact your Yaskawa representative Follow the key operations below Fig 3 9 to access the Auto Tuning Menu A TUNE A TUNE Tuning Mode Sel Main Menu Term Resistance Auto Tuning Fig 3 9 Auto Tuning Menu Access Procedure Digital Operator 3 13 Use and keys to scroll through the Auto Tuning parameter list Depending on the Control Method A1 02 setting only certain Auto Tuning parameters will be accessible See table below Table 3 13
282. rameter group Detected when F1 03 0 to 2 and Check the ref 05 1 02 1 3 The ref too hish eck the reference circuit an Overspeed Det The motor speed feedback U1 05 reference gain exceeded the setting in F1 08 for a longer A time than the setting in F1 09 The settings in F1 08 and Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 are not appropriate F1 09 AES Check the input circuit and reduce High input voltage at R L1 S L2 and T L3 the input power to within specifications DC Bus Overvoltage Extend the time in C1 02 or other The DC bus voltage has exceeded the trip The deceleration time is set active decel settings used such as DC Bus Overvolt n too short C1 04 C1 06 C1 08 or C1 09 208 240Vac Trip point is 410Vdc time 480 Trip point is 820Vdc Power factor correction capacitors are being used Remove the power factor the input or output to the correction capacitors Drive Dee Check the input voltage Input Phase Loss E Tighten the terminal screws PF Drive input power supply has an open phase Input Pha Loss or has a large imbalance of voltage Momentary power loss Detected when L8 05 1 enabled Check the input voltage There was a break in the PG Fix the broken disconnected wiring wiring PG Disconnection Detected when 1 02 0 to 2 and he PG was wired incorrectly A1 02 1 or3 5 Detected when
283. ration is Slow The following causes are possible The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Acceleration Level is set too low the acceleration time will be increased Check that the set value is suitable and that the load is not too large for the motor The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the motor speed and torque will be limited Check that the values set are suitable If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command The following causes are possible BPID is enabled If the PID mode is enabled b5 01 1 to 4 the Drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired setpoint The PID can command a speed up to maximum output frequency 1 04 If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy Above Base Speed in Open loop Vector Control Method The Drive s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage For example if 230Vac is input then the maximum output voltage will be 230Vac Vector control uses voltage to control the currents within the motor If the vector control volt age reference value exceeds the Drive output voltage capability the speed control accuracy will decrease because the motor currents cannot be properly controlled Use a motor with a low rated voltage compared to the input voltage or change t
284. rcentage of maximum 0 01 PID Output frequency 1 04 Myr Parameters A 41 Table A 2 F7 Monitor List Continued Parameter Parameter Name whe Description Display Units No Digital Operator Display PID Setpoint U1 38 PID Setpoint Setpoint of the PID regulator PID reference PID bias 0 0196 odbus serial communication error codes 00000000 1 CRC error 1 Data length error Not used Always 0 Modbus Communication Error Code Parity error Transmit Err Overrun error Framing error Timeout Not used Always 0 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation U1 40 Time Total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan FAN Elapsed Time 5 N Output from the speed control loop ASR before the ASR ASR output without filter SUCRE 01 44 ASR out w o Fil primary delay filter C5 06 100 is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor Feed forward control output Output from feed forward control 100 is displayed for rated 01 45 FF Cont Output secondary current of the motor Parameters 42 F7 Fault Trace List Table A 3 F7 Fault Trace List Fault Trace Current Fault ee Previous Fault Pes Frequency Reference at Previous Fault U2 03 Frequency Ref Output Frequency at Previous Fault Output Output Current at Previous Fault E Output Current Motor Spee
285. rcuit Overload Protection models have built in UL evaluated motor overload protection Motor overload protection is also provided in accordance with the NEC and CEC Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single motor applications Peripheral Devices E 5 Peripheral Devices The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input terminals R LI S L2 and T L3 Never connect a general LC RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit CAUTION Never connect a phase advancing capacitor to the input or output sides or a surge suppressor to the output side of the Drive When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor never turn it on or off during operation For more details on peripheral devices contact the manufacturer Magnetic Contactor Mount a surge protector on the coil When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive do not exceed one start per hour AC and DC reactor When using models F7U20P4 thru F7U2018 and F7U40P4 thru F7U4018 on a power supply transformer with a capacity of 600 or more install an or DC reactor The reactor improves the input power factor and provides protection to the rectifier circuit within the Drive Noise filter Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction See Chapter 2
286. re version model and control method The various items included on the Digital Operator are described below lt Drive Mode Indicators See Table 3 2 Menu Displa DRIVE lt a Ready Display Frequency Ref Drive can operate when a Drive command is input 1 60 00Hz 01 02 60 00Hz 8 Data Display Ui 03 10 05 Displays monitor data parameter data and settings 1 line x 18 characters 3 lines x 16 characters lt qa Key Descriptions See Table 3 1 RUN amp STOP Indicators See Tables 3 5 and 3 6 QUICK Control Method Currently Programmed Value Factory Default Setting Present Selection User adjusts Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator 3 2 Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Digital Operator Keys SS SS UI T Switches between operation via the Digital Operator LOCAL and the settings in parameter b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection and b1 02 Run Command LOCAL LOCAL REMOTE Selection REMOTE HEMOTE POE 9 This key can be enabled or disabled by the setting in parameter 02 01 The Drive must be in a stopped condition before it can be transferred to LOCAL or mode Scrolls through the five main menus MENU Operation DRIVE Quick Setting QUICK Programming ADV Modified Constants VE
287. rminal Fig 1 7 Terminal Arrangement Terminal Cover Removed Physical Installation 1 6 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions DIMENSIONS F7 1 208 240 F7U20P4 2018 480V F7U40P4 4018 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW MOUNTING HOLES AIR FOR A SIZE SCREW pte pt 138 DIA 2 HOLES SIZE J EH BH BH 87 DIA GE 2 a E 0 Lr Ex oS 1 2 wi p T D1 4 w a D 4 RATED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES APPROX RATED MODEL OUTPUT ae WEIGHT INPUT CIMR F7U CURRENT MOUNTING fes HD ND AMPS HD ND Ei Wi H w w2 D Di A B F J 20P4 32 36 0 5 0 5 0 75 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 20P7 44 46 075 1 10 47 496 11 02 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 21P5 7 0 78 1 1 5 2 10 47 496 11 02 5 51 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 140 66 22P2 9 6 10 8 2 3 1047 496 1102 551 28 28 630 154 10 335 473 197 110 66 208V 23P7 15 0 16 8 3 5 10 47 496
288. rol Method 1 V F control with PG 0to3 2 2 Open Loop Vector 3 Flux Vector Closed Loop Vector Used to return all parameters to their factory or user default settings Initializes and then returns A1 03 to zero Initialize Parameters 0 No Initialize 0to A1 03 Ini 1110 User Initialize The user must first set their own parameter 0 A A A A nit Parameters 3330 values and then store them using parameter 02 03 2220 2 Wire Initialization 3330 3 Wire Initialization A1 04 Password 1 When the value set into A1 04 does NOT match the value set into Enter Password 1 05 parameters A1 01 thru A1 03 and A2 01 thru A2 32 cannot 9999 be changed other parameters as determined by A1 01 can be A1 05 Password 2 changed Parameter A1 05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU Oto Select Password key while holding the RESET key 9999 as User Parameters User Parameter 1 User Parameter 2 User Parameter 3 User Parameter 4 User Parameter 5 Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level 2 05 1 01 1 These parameters are not related to the User Initialize User Param 5 2 function User Parameter 6 User Parameter 7 User Parameter 8 User Parameter 9 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 3 Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level A1 01 1 These parameters are no
289. rovided for Drives using insulated screw type terminal blocks All other models require the use of UL listed connectors Refer to Table 2 3 2 Recommended wire sizes are based on the normal duty ND current ratings and NEC Article 310 Table 310 16 75 degree Celsius copper or equivalent When sizing wiring based on the heavy duty HD current ratings consult NEC Article 430 and any other applicable codes Electrical Installation 2 4 Table 2 2 480Vac Wire Sizes and Connector Specifications Drive Model i CIMR F7U Terminal Symbol RILI S L2 TL3 Hi 2 B U T1 V T2 W T3 RILI 12 3 Bi 2 U T1 V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 T L3 Hi 2 B U T1 V T2 W T3 R LI 12 TL3 Bi CO U T1 V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 TL3 Bi CO U T1 V T2 W T3 Clamping Terminal Torque Screws lb in 10 6 13 2 21015 B2 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 B2 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 Bi C2 B1 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 10 6 to 13 2 1 2 to 1 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 RILI 12 T L3 2 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 12 TL3 1 21 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 U TI V T2 W T3 B2 21 99 2 5 21 99 2 5 21 99 2 5 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 35 2 to 43 99 4 0 to 5 0 R LI S L2 TL3 Hi 3 RULII 817121 TI L
290. ru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 For Models CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover ihRemoving the Digital Operator Use the same procedure for Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 iRemoving the Front Cover Loosen all screws on the front cover Lift up at the location labelled 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 14 Removing the Front Cover Mounting the Front Cover Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover If the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it the Digital Operator may malfunction due to improper mating with its connector 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Drive Mounting the Digital Operator Use the same procedure for Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40 4 thru 4018 Physical Installation 1 16 Chapter 2 Electrical Installation This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit terminal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Terminal Block Configuration 2 2 Wiring Main Circuit
291. s DATA ENTER to display Frequency Reference Press the LOCAL REMOTE key once This puts the Drive in the Local Mode allowing run stop and speed commands by the Digital Operator The AUTO SEQ and AUTO REF indicators turn off and the FWD light turns on 17 Display monitor 91 01 Frequency Ref in the Operation menu Start Up 4 7 18 19 A WARNING THE NEXT KEY PRESS WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR TO ROTATE TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS Check the motor rotation Press and hold the JOG key to check motor rotation The RUN light turns on and the STOP light is off U1 01 Frequency now displays 6 00Hz on the Digital Operator The frequency reference for this operation comes from parameter 41 17 Jog Reference with factory default setting of 6 00Hz The motor should ramp up to speed If the motor rotation is incorrect swap any two motor leads U T1 V T2 W T3 on the Drive terminal and repeat the motor rotation check The encoder phasing polarity may also need to be reversed Proceed to the Auto Tuning section Open Loop Vector Start up 1 8 9 10 See Drive Start Up Procedures on Page 4 5 Apply input power to the Drive Set the control method of the Drive to Open Loop Vector Control by pressing the MENU key twice for the Quick Setting menu Press the ENTER key to display A1 02 Control Method Use the UP and DOWN keys and the DATA ENTER key to set this parameter to 2 Open Loop V
292. se pulse input terminals Pulse input common 12Vdc 10 20mA max A phase pulse monitor output terminals Pulse monitor output common Shield connection terminal B Wiring the PG A2 Wiring examples are provided in the following figures for the PG A2 Drive Branch Circuit Protection Qvni2 2 1 1 1 e Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG A2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 17 PG A2 Open Collector Input Wiring Sourcing PG Electrical Installation 2 32 Drive Branch Ont Circuit Owe 1 1 Protection __Owis PONT EY Pulse monitor output e Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the PG A2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 18 PG A2 Open Collector Input Wiring Sinking PG Electrical Installation 2 33 m 2 The terminal specifications for the PG B2 are given in Table 2 19 Table 2 19
293. signal lines Do not use the PG W2 s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Do not use PG W2 to supply both PG units Fig 2 23 PG W2 Wiring Electrical Installation 2 39 Wiring Terminal Blocks B Wire Sizes Same for Models Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2 23 Pulse generator power supply Pulse input terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Table 2 23 Wire Sizes Terminal Wire Thickness Screws AWG mm Stranded wire 20 to 17 0 5 to 1 0 Single wire Terminal Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable 20 to 17 0 5 to 1 0 Belden 9504 Hitachi KPEV S or equivalent Shield connection terminal 20 to 16 0 5 to 1 5 Wiring Method and Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring Separate the control signal lines for the PG Encoder Feedback Board from main circuit lines and power lines Connect the shield when connecting a PG Encoder The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise Also do not use any lines that are more than 100m long Refer to Fig 2 12 for details on connecting the shield Do not solder the ends of wires Doing so may cause contact faults When straight solderless terminals are
294. stop any time the S2 SN connection is broken If the 3 wire configuration is implemented via a 3 wire Initialization A1 0323330 terminal 3 becomes the Forward Reverse input Fig 5 2 3 Wire Control Basic Programming 5 4 To issue a run command via Modbus serial communication Set b1 02 2 Modbus communication and connect the Modbus RS 485 422 serial communication cable to R S and 5 on the removable terminal block Make sure the S1 1 switch and the Modbus H5 parameters are properly set To issue the RUN command via an option card Set b1 02 3 and install an option board into the 2CN port on the control board Consult the manual supplied with the option board for instructions on integrating the Drive and communication option board IMPORTANT If b1 01 3 but an option board is not installed in 2CN an OPEO5 operator programming error will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the Drive will not run Stopping Method b1 03 Stopping Method Selection O E Ramp o Stop factory defaul DC Injection to Stop Coast to Stop with Timer There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the RUN command is removed 0 Ramp to stop When the run command is removed the Drive will decelerate the motor to minimum output frequency E1 09 and then shut off The rate of deceleration is determined by the active deceleration time The factory default Decel Time is parameter 1 02 Basic Programming 5 5 When the output
295. stopping method when a PG open circuit fault PGO occurs See parameter F1 14 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast Stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Alarm Only Drive continues operation Sets the stopping method when an overspeed OS fault occurs See F1 08 and F1 09 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time Coast to stop Fast Stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in 09 Alarm Only Drive continues operation Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation fault occurs See F1 10 and 1 11 0 Ramp to stop Decelerate to stop using the active deceleration time 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast Stop Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Alarm Only Drive continues operation Fwd C C W Phase A leads with forward run command Phase B leads with reverse run command Fwd C W Phase B leads with forward run command Phase A leads with reverse run command Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor of the PG B2 encoder feedback option board This function is not available with the 2 option board Division ratio 1 n m n 0 to 1 m 1 to 32 The first digit of the value of F1 06 stands for n the second and the third stand for m from left to right The possible division ratio settings are 1 32 F1 06 1 Sets i
296. t bias as a percentage of the maximum output d5 05 P frequency E1 04 Bias is given to the specified speed limit It can 0 to 120 Speed Lmt Bias T i be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit Set the delay time from inputting the multi function input speed torque control change from On to OFF or OFF to ON Speed Torque Control until the control is actually changed This function is enabled when 010 45 06 Switchover Timer the multi function input speed torque control change 1000 Ref Hold Time 1 71 is set While in the speed torque control switching timer the analog inputs hold the value present when the speed torque control change is received Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running For Heavy Duty HD Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 300 0 For Normal Duty ND Rating Setting Range 0 0 to 400 0 Parameters 13 Control Method Factory Setting Mis rios Flux p Vector Vector IES SEHEN Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name RC Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Mis rios Flux Vector Vector E Field Weakening Magnetic Field Weakening Sets the Drive output voltage when the multi function input field Level weakening command is input H1 XX 63 Sets as a percentage 0 to 100 8096 Field Weak Lvl taking the voltage set in the V F pattern as 100 Sets the lower limit
297. t breakers per the NEC When selecting semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input I t protection and comply with UL CSA NEC and CEC branch circuit short circuit protection requirements select one of the fuses in Table E 3 or E 4 Fuse Type UL designated Time Delay or Non Time Delay Fuse Class CC J T RK1 or RK5 Designators typica FRS LPJ LPS JKS JIN or JJS Voltage Rating 250V for Drives with 208 240V input 600V for Drives with 480V input Circuit Breaker Type Inverse Time MCCB or Instantaneous Trip MCP Voltage Rating 600V Table E 1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC 208 240Vac Input Input Output Fuse Circuit Breaker Amps Amps Selection Criteria Selection Criteria puse 1 CIMR F7U Continuous Continuous Time Delay Non Time Delay Rating Rating Fuse Rating A Fuse m A ating 22P2 Le 2110 Input and Output Amps based on the Normal Duty ND current rating Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty HD and Normal Duty ND ratings Peripheral Devices E 2 Table E 2 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC 480Vac Input Input Output Fuse Circuit Breaker pt Selection Criteria Selection Criteria Amps Amps 1 Maximum Maximum Continuous Continuous Mite pev Rating Rating Fuse Rating A Fuse Rating A 43P7 Model Hp CI
298. t related to the User Initialize function Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 4 Control Method Factory Setting Loop Vector gt gt gt Parameter No pA Sequence b1 01 b1 02 b1 03 b1 04 b1 06 DC Injection Braking DC Injection Braking Current 7 DCInj Current Parameter Name Digital Operator Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Run Command Selection Run Source Stopping Method Selection Stopping Method Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Minimum Output Frequency E1 09 or Less Operation Selection Zero Speed Oper Digital Input Scan Time Cntl Input Scans Local Remote Run Selection LOC REM RUN Sel Run Command Selection During Program RUN CMD at PRG DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq DC Injection Braking Time at Start DCInj Time GStart DC Injection Braking Time at Stop DCInj Time C Stop Magnetic Flux Compensation Capacity Field Comp Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Description Selects the frequency reference input source 0 Operator Digital preset speed U1 01 or d1 01 to d1 17 1 Terminals Analog input terminal A1 or terminal A2 based on parameter H3 09 2 Serial Com Modbus RS 422 485 terminals R S and S 3 Option PCB Optio
299. te parameter data to EEPROM 0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100 000 Do not frequently execute Enter command 0900H written to EEPROM The Enter command registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address will become invalid Error code 02H IMPORTANT Communications D 16 Error Codes The following table shows Modbus communication error codes Table D 8 Error Codes Error Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the master Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16 write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run Attempting to write via Enter commands during run e Attempting to write parameters other than 1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when a defective EEP
300. th Timer new run command is ignored if input before the timer expires Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency 0 0 E1 0 to 10 0sec Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero 6000 0 E1 04 Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform Setting range determined by C6 01 setting Low noise Fe 2 0 kHz Varies 5 0 kHz LtoF b 3 8 0 kHz Fe 10 0 kHz Fe 12 5 kHz Fe 15 0 kHz Program Determined by the settings of C6 03 thru C6 05 Frequency Reference 1 5 22 44 5 Setting units are affected by 1 03 Frequency Reference 2 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 2 reference 1 is ON Setting units are affected by 1 03 03 Frequency Reference 3 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 3 reference 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 04 Frequency Reference 4 Frequency reference when multi function input Multi step speed Reference 4 reference 1 2 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when Jog Frequency Reference Forward Jog or Reverse Jog is selected via multi function input terminals or JOG key is pressed on the operator keypad Jog reference has priority over frequency reference to 4 Setting units are affected by 01 03 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference Denotes that param
301. the direction of arrow 2 d ll gt 2 ji Fig 1 10 Removing the Terminal Cover Attaching the Terminal Cover After wiring the terminal block attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure For Models CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place For Drives CIMR F7U2022 4030 and larger insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Drive and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up toward the top of the Drive Physical Installation 1 18 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Models CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40P4 thru 4018 For Models CIMR F7U2018 4018 and smaller remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover Removing the Digital Operator Press on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock then lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 11 Fig 1 11 Removing the Digital Operator iRemoving the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the direction of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove it as shown in Fig 1 12 Fig 1 12 Removing the Front Cover E Mounting the Front
302. the motor exceeds 1 17V for time L1 05 and thermistor L1 03 0 to 2 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating 2 Recheck the accel decel time Detected when A2 or programmed for Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overheat 2 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 B measured by the motor exceeds 2 34V for time L1 05 and thermistor L1 03 0 to 2 thru E1 13 Recheck the motor rated current value E2 01 The load was too large The Recheck the cycle time and the cycle time was too short at the size of the load as well as the Motor Overload accel decel time times set in C1 01 and C1 02 Detected when L1 01 1 to 3 and the OL1 Drive s output current exceeded the motor The voltage of the V F Motor Overloaded overload curve pattern was incorrect for the The overload curve is adjustable using application parametr Motor rated current setting Check the motor rated current was improper value in E2 01 Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load as well as the times set in C1 01 and 1 02 Review the V F pattern parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 The load was too large or the accel decel times are too short OL2 Drive Overload The Drive output current exceeded the Drive s overload curve The voltage of the V F pattern was incorrect for the application The size of the Drive was too Change
303. ther motor protection measures Signal and control leads must be separated from main circuit leads R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 Determine proper wire size for power and motor leads Refer to Tables 2 1 and 2 2 for details Review proper ground connections for the Drive Refer to Chapter 2 Electrical Installation for details The Drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal Ground resistance should be less than 1000 for a 208 240Vac Drive Ground resistance should be less than 100 for a 480Vac Drive Select wire size suitable for the size of terminal screw Make the length as short as possible Never ground the Drive in common with welding machines other motors or other large current electrical equipment Where several Drives are used ground each Drive directly or daisy chain to the ground pole s DO NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THEGROUND LEADS See Fig 2 4 Review terminal functions of signal and control circuits Refer to Table 2 11 Verify if any customer safety devices are required e g firestat freezestat high static pressure Record the following motor nameplate information Motor Rated Power KW Voltage Full Load Amps Rated Frequency Number of Poles Rated Speed RPM Verify that the commercial power supply is within the rated Drive input voltage Power Supply VAC Drive Input Voltage VAC 2 Verify that the leads in the 3 Phase electric motor conduit box are conf
304. thod Selection has been set to a value other than 0 b5 15 PID Sleep Function Start Level has been set to a value other than 0 b1 03 Stopping Method Selection was set to 2 or 3 parameter settings were out of range A minimum frequency value is set higher than the maximum frequency Parameter setting was incorrect Power supply is turned OFF Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 14 Corrective Action Check parameters b5 01 b5 15 and b1 03 and correct the error Check parameters E1 04 E1 11 Check the parameter settings and correct the errors Cycle power to the Drive Do a factory initialization A1 03 Auto Tuning Faults Auto Tuning faults are shown below When the following faults are detected the fault is displayed on the Digital Operator and the motor coasts to a stop No fault or alarm outputs will occur Table 6 4 Auto Tuning Fault Displays and Processing Digital Operator Display Er 02 Minor Fault Er 03 STOP key Er 04 Resistance Er 05 No Load Current Er 08 Rated Slip Er 09 Accelerate Er 11 Motor Speed Er 12 I det Circuit Motor Data Fault STOP Key Input Line to Line Resistance Fault No Load Current Fault Rated Slip Fault Acceleration Fault Detected only for rotational Auto Tuning Motor Speed Fault Detected only for rotational Auto Tuning Current Detection Fault Probable Cause is an error in t
305. thod Selections 3 11 b1 01 Frequency Reference Selections 3 11 b1 02 Run Command Selections 3 11 b1 03 Stopping Method Selections 3 11 C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 2 2 3 11 C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 3 11 C6 02 Carrier Frequency Selection 3 11 41 01 Frequency Reference 1 22 2 3 11 d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 3 11 d1 03 Frequency Reference 3 3 11 41 04 Frequency Reference 4 3 11 41 17 Jog Reference sese 3 11 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting esses 3 11 E1 03 Input Voltage Setting 2 44 2 3 11 E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency 3 11 E1 05 Maximum Output Voltage 3 11 E1 06 Base Frequency eee 3 11 E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency 3 11 1 13 Base Voltage esee 3 11 E2 01 Motor Rated Current sess 3 11 E2 04 Number of motor poles 3 11 E2 11 Motor Rated Output sess 3 11 F1 01 PG Pulses Revolutions 3 11 H4 02 Terminal FM Gain Setting 3 11 H4 05 Terminal AM Gain Setting
306. ti function output H2 LILI settings Fref Fout agree 2 agree 2 Frequency detection 3 or Frequency detection 4 Parameter 14 03 sets the level while parameter L4 04 sets the hysteresis for the speed detection output function Determines how the Drive will react when the frequency reference is lost The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 9096 or more of its current value in less than 400ms 0 Stop Drive will stop 1 Run at L4 06 PrevRef Drive will run at the percentage set in 14 06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost If the frequency reference loss function is enabled L4 05 1 and frequency reference is lost the Drive will run at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula Fref Fref at time of loss L4 06 Fault Restart Sets the counter for the number of times the Drive will perform an automatic restart on the following faults GF LF OC OV PF PUF OLI OL2 OL3 OL4 UV1 Auto restart will check to see if the fault has cleared every 5ms When no fault is present the Drive will attempt an auto restart If the Drive faults after an auto restart attempt the counter is incremented When the Drive operates without fault for 10 minutes the counter will reset to the value set in L5 01 Determines if the fault contact activates during an automatic restart attempt 0 No Fault Relay fault
307. ti ste reference 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi reference 1 4 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi reference 2 4 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi reference 1 2 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi reference 3 4 is ON Setting unit Frequency reference when multi reference 1 3 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when multi reference 2 3 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 unction in unction in unction in unction in unction in unction in Frequency reference when multi unction in put Multi ste s are affected by 01 03 put Multi ste s are affected by o1 03 put Multi ste put Multi stey s are affected by 01 03 put Multi ste put Multi ste put Multi stey p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed p speed Reference 16 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference Frequency Reference Upper Limit Ref Upper Limit Frequency Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Master Speed Reference Lower Limit Ref1 Lower Limit reference 1 2 3 4 is ON Setting units are affected by 01 03 Frequency reference when Jog frequency reference is selected via multi function input termin
308. time longer than the setting in the PG PPly P F1 14 Brake mechanism is Check for open circuit when possibly engaged using brake motor correction capacitors Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 11 Table 6 2 Alarm Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Ensure the values in L6 02 and UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Undertorq Det 1 Drive output current lt L6 02 for more than Motor was underloaded Flashing the time set in L6 03 when L6 01 5 or 6 status to eliminate fault Ensure the values in L6 05 and 014 Undertorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Undertorq Det 2 Drive output current lt L6 05 for more than Motor was underloaded Flashing the time set in L6 06 when L6 04 5 or 6 status to eliminate fault Check the input circuit and Low input voltage was at DC Bus Undervoltage S L2 and T L3 increase the input power to The DC bus voltage is lt L2 05 within specifications UV Default Th don Extend the time in C1 01 or other DC Bus Undervolt 208 240Vac Trip point is 190Vdc acceleration time Was Set active accel settings used such as Flashing 480Vac Trip point is 380Vdc too short C1 03 C1 05 or C1 07 time Detected while Drive is in a stopped condition Voltage fluctuation of the input Check the input voltage power was too large Cycle power to the Drive External load was Control Power Supply Undervoltage
309. tive time A setting of 0 00 disables PID D Time derivative control b5 06 PID Output Limit PID Limit Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Set as a percentage 96 of maximum frequency Parameters A 6 Used in conjunction with a multi function digital input and a multi sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller b 02 Proportional Gain Setting Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller ou 0 0 to 3000 0 0 0 to 0 0 to 360 0 1 0sec 0 0 to 0 00 to 10 00 0 00sec 0 00 to Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter Parameter Name Re Setting Factory No Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting ise Vector Vector Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller Set as 100 0 b5 07 PID Offset Adjustment a percentage 76 of maximum frequency to 0 0 PID Offset The offset is summed with the PID output This can be used to arti 4100 0 d ficially kick start a slow starting PID loop b5 08 PID Primaty Delay Time Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID 0 00 to Constant controller 10 00 PID Delay Time Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse b5 00 PID Output Level Selection acting Output Level Sel 0 Normal Output direct acting 1 Reverse Output reverse acting
310. to a larger size Drive small Ensure the values in L6 02 and OL3 Overtorque Detection 1 L6 03 are appropriate Overtoraue Det 1 Drive output current gt L6 02 for more than Motor was overloaded q the time set in L6 03 and L6 01 3 or 4 Check application machine status to eliminate fault Review the V F pattern an OYETAN parameters E1 01 thru E1 13 Ensure the values in L6 05 and 014 Overtorque Detection 2 L6 06 are appropriate Overtoraue Det 2 Drive output current gt L6 05 for more than Motor was overloaded TEN 4 the time set in L6 06 and L6 04 3 or 4 Check application machine status to eliminate fault High Slip Braking OL Make sure the load is an inertial The output frequency stayed constant for The inertia of the load is too longer than the time set in n3 04 during large If possible reduce the load high slip braking inertia Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 6 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Digital Operator Connection Fault Attach Digital Operat r g The Digital Operator was not OPR E Ed attached or the Digital Check the Digital Operator removed and the Drive is commanded to Operat t Oper Disconnect run through the Digital Operator b1 02 0 Verify the setting of 02 06 Overshooting Undershooting Adjust the ASR settings in the C5 Motor Overspeed was occurring pa
311. ts the Drive s DC Bus undervoltage trip level If this is set lower 12 05 than the factory setting additional AC input reactance or DC bus 150 to 190 PUV Det Level reactance may be necessary Consult the factory before changing 210 Vdc this parameter setting 12 06 KEB Deceleration Rate Sets the time required to decelerate to zero speed when a KEB 0 0 to 0 0 KEB Decel Time command is input from a multi function input 200 0 Momentary Recovery Time Set the time in seconds to accelerate to the set speed after 0 0 to L2 07 i recovery from a momentary power loss If setting 0 0 then active 0 0sec UV Return Time C ND 25 5 acceleration time is used instead Frequency Reduction Gain at Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning 12 08 KEB Start 2 when KEB command is input from multi function 0 to 300 100 KEB Frequ ncy Reduction slip frequency before KEB operation x L2 08 x 2 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Parameters A 31 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Open Loop Vector Parameter Parameter Name No Digital Operator Display E Stall Prevention Selects the stall prevention method used to prevent excessive current during acceleration 0 Disabled Motor accelerates at active acceleration rate The motor may stall if load is too heavy or accel time is too short Stall Prevention Selection 1 General
312. ue or Drive rated current V F V F w PG Internal overtorque detection level L6 02 disabled Stall Prevention Level During Run Terminal A3 Function 00 L3 06 Selection Frequency Reference Lower Limit 0 to IF Terminal A3 Sel 00 Maximum output frequency 1 04 Either d2 02 setting or A3 input level whichever is greater becomes effective Jump Frequency 4 0096 2 Maximum output frequency E PID Feedback 0096 2 Maximum output frequency E PID Set Point 0096 2 Maximum output frequency E Frequency reference no longer acts as a PID setpoint Frequency Reference Bias 2 FBIAS2 0096 2 Maximum output frequency E1 04 Total bias Internal bias H3 03 FBIAS H3 07 A3 input level Motor Temperature See parameters L1 03 amp L1 04 FWD Torque Limit Quadrant 1 00 Motor rated torque REV Torque Limit Quadrant 3 00 Motor rated torque Regenerative Torque Limit Quadrants 2 and 4 00 Motor rated torque Torque Reference in Torque Control Torque Limit in Speed Control Quadrants 1 2 3 4 00 Motor rated torque 4 Torque Compensation Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running Note Some analog inputs are control method dependent Parameters A 27 Table A 1 F7 Parameter List Continued Control Method Parameter T Setting Factory Digital Operator Display Description Range Setting Vector H3 06 Terminal
313. uick Setting menu It is a two step process to set the Drive up for preset speeds First d1 01 through d1 04 and d1 17 must be programmed with the desired preset speeds and the desired jog speed respectively Next three of the Drive s digital inputs need to be programmed and wired as Multi step Speed Reference 1 Multi step Speed Reference 2 and Jog Frequency Table 5 1 Preset Speed Terminal Terminal Terminal Preset Speed programmed programmed programmed Details as Multi step as Multi step as Jog Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 or analog input A1 Frequency Reference 2 d1 02 or analog input A2 OFF The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi step speeds OFF OFF OFF As shown in the above table it is possible to use analog inputs place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency Reference 2 Ifb1 01 1 then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed If b1 01 0 then Frequency Reference 1 d1 01 will be used If H3 05 2 then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 41 02 for the second preset speed If H3 05 2 then Frequency Reference 2 will be used IMPORTANT The programming of d1 01 through 01 17 will be in the units specified by the display scaling parameter 01 03 Basic Programming 5 10 Input Voltage Setting 1 01 Input Voltage Setting Setting Range 155 0 t
314. ult 3 9 02 12 Output Terminal Status at Fault 3 9 02 13 Drive Operation Status at Fault 3 9 02 14 Cumulative Operation Time at Fault 3 9 U3 Fault History List eee 3 10 93 01 Last Fault etit 3 10 U3 02 Fault Message 2 3 10 U3 03 Fault Message 3 3 10 U3 04 Fault Message 4 3 10 U3 05 Elapsed Time 1 3 10 U3 06 Elapsed Time 2 3 10 U3 07 Elapsed Time 3 3 10 U3 08 Elapsed Time 4 3 10 U3 09 Fault Message 5 3 10 U3 10 Fault Message 6 3 10 U3 11 Fault Message 7 222 2 4 022 3 10 03 12 Fault Message 8 3 10 U3 13 Fault Message 9 3 10 U3 14 Fault Message 10 3 10 03 15 Elapsed Time 5 3 10 U3 16 Elapsed Time 6 3 10 03 17 Elapsed Time 7 3 10 U3 18 Elapsed Time 8 3 10 03 19 Elapsed Time 9 3 10 U3 20 Elapsed Time 20
315. utput current Main circuit protection Fuse in DC bus circuit Normal Duty C6 01 2 Approximately 110 of rated output current for 60 seconds Heavy Duty C6 01 0 150 of rated output current for 60 seconds 208 240Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410Vdc 480Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820Vdc 208 240Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190Vdc 480Vac Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380Vdc Overload protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Protective Functions Momentary power loss ride thru Two selectable methods 1 Time base for up to 2 seconds 2 Until control power is active Heatsink over temperature Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration and running Ground fault protection Protection by electronic circuit 50 of inverter rated current DC bus charge Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50Vdc or more Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 CIMR F7U20P4 thru 2018 and 40 4 thru 4018 Open chassis type IP00 CIMR F7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300 Ambient operating 14 F to 104 F 10 C to 40 C NEMA 1 type temperature 14 F to 113 F 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type Vibration 10 to 20Hz 32 ft sec 9 8 m s max 20 to 50Hz 6 5 ft sec 2 m s max Enclosure Type Environment Specifications C 5 Notes
316. ve red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal 1 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal U T1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal V T2 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal W T3 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal Expected reading is OL displayed Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U TI Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal V T2 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Place the positive red meter lead on terminal Place the negative black meter lead on terminal W T3 Expected reading is about 0 5Vdc Output Transistors Q1 Q12 Place the positive red meter lead on terminal 1 Place the negative black meter lead on terminal U TI Expected reading is OL displayed Place th
317. ve data to the Repeat the read Digital Operator s EEPROM failed Replace Digital Operator CPE The Drive type or software number was different than the stored data in the Digital ID UNMATCHED Operator VAE The capacity of the Drive and the capacity Use stored data for the same Drive INV KVA UNMATCH of the stored data are different capacity 02 04 The control method of the Drive and the CRE control method of the stored data in the Use stored data for the same control COPY CONTROL UNMATCHED lt method 1 02 Function Digital Operator were different IFE The data file read from the Drive was of the READ READ DATA ERROR wrong size indicating corrupted data Function Use stored data for the F7 Drive and software number U1 14 A parameter setting written to the Drive was different than the setting stored in the Retry the Copy function 03 01 2 Digital Operator CYE COPY ERROR Upon completion of the COPY function the Drive s data checksum was different Retry the Copy function 03 01 2 than the Digital Operator s data checksum Verify VYE The set value of the Digital Operator and VERIFY ERROR the Drive do not match Retry the Vertby Tunetion 03 0153 CSE SUM CHECK ERROR Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 17 Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring etc the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started If this occurs use
318. y 4 2kHz Maximum output frequency Rated output capacity 51 0 59 0 73 0 95 0 120 0 140 0 180 0 200 0 230 0 315 0 390 0 510 0 Horsepower 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Rated output current 67 2 77 0 96 0 125 0 156 0 180 0 240 0 260 0 304 0 414 0 515 0 675 0 Overload capacity 96 of rated output 107 117 114 108 115 120 108 120 120 107 118 120 current for 60 sec 300 0Hz Output ratings Current limit 96 of rated output current Carrier frequency kHz 8 8 8 5 5 8 5 5 5 2 2 2 Maximum output frequency Maximum output voltage 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 Vac Proportional to input voltage The difference between Heavy Duty ratings and the Normal Duty ratings for the Drive are the rated input and output current overload capacity carrier frequency current limit and maximum output frequency Parameter C6 01 must be set to value of 0 for Heavy Duty ratings and 2 for Normal Duty ratings Factory default is Heavy Duty 6 01 0 2 Horsepower ratings are based on 230V or 460V NEC Table 430 150 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole motor When selecting the actual motor and Drive be sure that the Drive s rated output current is appropriate for the motor s rated current 3 Models 2110 4220 4300 have an overload rating of 120 of rated output current for 60 seconds 4 2kHz is the Maximum carrier frequency value and
319. y C1 01 and C1 02 are set than Drive rated output correctly current Check load conditions Check for dirt build up on the by f d heatsink Heatsink Overheat The temperature of the Drive s heatsink The ambient temperature was Reduce the ambient temperature OH exceeded the setting in L8 02 and too high around the Drive 8 03 0 to 2 2 Heatsink Overtemp R The Drive s cooling fan s stopped Replace the cooling fan Drive s internal cooling fan stopped The Drive s internal cooling F7U2018 F7U4018 and larger fan s stopped There was a heat source Check for dirt build up on the nearby fans and heatsink Heatsink EN The ambient temperature was Reduce the ambient temperature The temperature of the Drive s heatsink too hish around the Drive OH1 exceeded 105 degrees C E Replace the cooling fan Drive s internal cooling fan stopped The Drive s internal cooling F7U2011 F7U4011 and larger capacities fan s stopped Heatsink Max Temp The Drive s cooling fan s stopped Diagnostic amp Troubleshooting 6 5 Table 6 1 Fault Displays and Processing continued Digital Operator Display Description Cause Corrective Action Recheck the cycle time and the size of the load Motor Overheating 1 Recheck the accel decel time OH3 Detected when A2 or A3 programmed for Overheating of motor as C1 01 and C1 02 Motor Overheat 1 motor temperature H3 09 or H3 05 E measured by
320. y precise speed and torque control at a wide speed range including zero speed It requires encoder feedback Basic Programming 5 2 Speed Command Source B b1 01 Reference Source Selection Operator Monitor U1 01 or parameter d1 01 Terminals Analog input terminal A1 Terminal A2 sums together with terminal Al when H3 09 0 factory default Option Board Option board connected on 2CN Pulse Train Input Terminal RP and AC In order to run the Drive and motor in REMOTE mode the Drive must receive a run command and a speed command from an external source Parameter b1 01 specifies from where the speed command will be accepted To switch into the REMOTE mode press the LOCAL REMOTE button on the Digital Operator while the Drive is stopped Modbus Serial Communication RS 422 485 terminals R 5 and S i IMPORTANT If the set speed command is less than the minimum output frequency E1 09 with a run command input the RUN indicator on the Digital Operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the Digital Operator will blink To have the Drive follow the speed command set by the Digital Operator Set b1 01 0 The speed command can then be entered into the U1 01 monitor or in parameter 41 01 To have the Drive follow an analog speed command Set b1 01 1 and connect a 0 to 10Vdc or 10 to 10 signal to terminals Al and AC Be sure to set parameter H3 01 to the proper setting Or connect a 4 20mA

F7 Drive User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents